BS8118 - 1991 - Structural Use of Aluminium Part 1

BRITISH STANDARD 35 8118 :
?art 1 : 1991
nccwpmting
Lmendment No. 1
Structural use of
aluminium
Part 1: Code of practice fordesign
--``,``,,``,````````,``````,,,,`-`-`,,`,,`,`,,`---
ICs 91.080.10
NO COPYING WITHOUT BSI PERMISSION EXCEPT AS PERMITTED BY COPYRIGHT LA1
Copyright British Standards Institution

Provided by IHS under license with BSI - Uncontrolled Copy Licensee=Rolls Royce Enterprise Wide/5973912035, User=Wootton, John
No reproduction or networking permitted without license from IHS Not for Resale, 07/16/2013 06:15:20 MDT
Committees responsible for this
British Standard
The preparationof this British Standard was entrusted the
by Civil Engineering and
Building Structures StandardsPolicy Comnuttee(CSW-) to Technical Comnuttee
CSE936,upon whichthe following bodies were represented
Aluminium Federation
Association of Consulting Engineers
Institution of Civil Engineers
Institution of Structural Engineers
London Regional "ansport
Mirustry of Defence
Royal Institute of British Architects
Royal Institutionof Chartered Surveyors
Welding Institute
This British Standard, having

been prepared under the
direction of the Civil Engineering
and Building Structures
Standards Policy Committee, was
published under the authority of
the Standards Committee and
comes into effect on
31 March 1992
Amendments issued sincepublication
O BSI 07-1999
Amd. No. Date comment
10485 July 1999 Indicated by a side line
The followingBSI references

relate to the work on this
standard:
Committee reference CSEX36
Draft for comment W12254 DC
ISBN O 580 19209 1
--``,``,,``,````````,``````,,,,`-`-`,,`,,`,`,,`---

Contents
page
Committees responsible h i d e front cover
Foreword 9
Code of practice
Section 1. General
1.1 Scope 10
1.2 Definitions 10
1.3 m o r symbols 11
Section 2. Properties and selection of materials
2.1 Designation of materials 15
2.2 Permitted materials 15
2.2.1 Extrusions, sheet,plate, drawn tube, forgings and castings 15
2.2.2 Bolts and rivets 16
2.2.3 Filler metals 22
2.3 Strength, mechanical and physical properties 22
2.3.1 Strength and mechanical properties 22
--``,``,,``,````````,``````,,,,`-`-`,,`,,`,`,,`---
25.2 Physical properties 22
2.4 Durability and corrosion protection 22
2.4.1 General 22
2.4.2 Durability of alloys 23
2.4.3 Corrosion protection 23
2.5 Fabridonand construction 26
2.5.1 General 26
2.5.2 Bending and forming 26
2.5.3 Welding 26
2.6 Selection of materials 26
2.7 Availability 26
2.7.1 General 26
2.7.2 structural sections 26
2.7.3 Tube 29
2.7.4 Sheet, strip and plate 29
2.7.5 Forgings 29
2.7.6 CaStings 29
Section 3. Design principles
3.1 Limit state design 30
3.2 Loading 30
3.2.1 General 30
3.2.2 Nominal l o a m 30
3.2.3 Factored loading 30
effects 3.2.4 Dynamic 31

O BSI 07-1999
Provided by IHS under license with BSI - Uncontrolled Copy Licensee=Rolls Royce Enterprise Wide/5973912035, User=Wootton, John 1
~~ ~ ~~ ~ ~ ~~~
STD-BSI BS 8LL8: PART L-ENGL L992 m l b 2 V b b 9 079V532 Vb3 D

BS 8118 : Part 1 : 1991
page
3.3 Static strength 31
3.3.1 General 31
3.3.2 Actioneffect under factored loading 31
3.3.3 Factored resistance 31
3.4 Deformation 31
3.4.1 Recoverable elastic deformation 31
3.4.2 Pernxment inelastic deformation 32
3.4.3 Distortion due to frequent assembly 32
3.5 Durability 32
3.6 Fatigue 32
3.6.1 General 32
3.6.2 Total collapse 32
3.6.3 Stable crack growth 32
3.7 Vibration 33
3.8 Testing 33
Section 4. Static designof members
4.1 Introduction 34
4.1.1 General 34
4.1.2 Linut state of static strength 34
4.1.3 Heat-affected zones W s ) 34
4.1.4 Advanced design 34
4.2 Linuting stresses 34
4.3 Section classification and local buckling 34
4.3.1 General 34
4.3.2 Slenderness parameterß 37
4.3.3 Section classification 40
4.3.4 Local bucklung 40
4.4 HAZ softenmg macent to welds 41
4.4.1 General 41
4.4.2 Severity of softening 41
4.4.3 Extent of HAZ 41
4.5 B€!amS 46
--``,``,,``,````````,``````,,,,`-`-`,,`,,`,`,,`---
4.5.1 Introduction 46
4.5.2 Uniaxial monlent resistance of the section 46
4.5.3 Shear force resistance 47
4.5.4 Combined moment and shear force 48
4.5.5 Web bearing 49
4.5.6 Lateral torsional buckling 49
4.6 Tension members 51
4.6.1 General 51
4.6.2 Tension resistance 53
4.6.3 Eccentrically connectedties 53

page
4.7 Compression members 54
4.7.1 General 54
4.7.2 Section classification for axial compression 54
4.7.3 Resistance to overall buckling 54
4.7.4 Colunm bucklig 54
4.7.5 Torsional buckling 58
4.7.6 Strut curve selection 58
4.7.7 Local squashing 64
4.7.8 Hybrid sections 65
4.7.9 Certain casesof eccentrically connectedstruts 65
--``,``,,``,````````,``````,,,,`-`-`,,`,,`,`,,`---
4.7.10 Battened struts 66
4.8 Bending with axial force and biaxial bending 66
4.8.1 General 66
4.8.2 Section classification and localb u c m under combined actions 67
4.8.3 Section check 67
4.8.4 Overall buckling check 67
4.9 Deformation (serviceabilitylimit state) 68
4.9.1 General 68
4.9.2 Recoverable elastic deflection 68
~~
Section 5. Plates and plate girders

5.1 General 69
5.2 Unstiffened plates 69
5.2.1 General 69
5.2.2 Unstiffened plates under directstress 70
5.2.3 Unstiffened plates under in-plane moment 70
5.2.4 Longitudinal stress w e n t on unstiffened plates 71
5.2.5 UnstifTened plates in shear 71
5.2.6 Combined actions 71
5.3 Multi-stiffened plating 72
5.3.1 General 72
5.3.2 Multi-stiffened plating under uniform compression 72
5.3.3 Multi-stiffened plating under in-plane moment 72
5.3.4 Longitudinal stress gradlent on multi-stiffened plates 73
5.3.5 Multi-stiffened plating inshear 73
5.4 Plate girders 73
5.4.1 General 73
5.4.2 Moment resistance of transversely stiffened plate girders 74
5.4.3 Shear resistance of transversely stiffened plate girders 74
5.4.4 Longitudinally and transversely stiffened girders 78
5.4.5 Web stiffeners and tongueplates 78
5.4.6 Use of corrugated or closely stiffened webs 80
5.4.7 Girders under combined moment andshear 80

O BSI 07-1999
~
~~~
STDaBSI BS ALLB: PART L-ENGL L99L L b 2 4 b b 9 0794534 23b

BS8118 : Part 1 : 1991
Section 6. Static design of joints

6.1 General 82
6.2 Riveted and bolted joints: design considerations 82
6.2.1 General 82
6.2.2 Groups of fasteners 82
6.2.3 Effect of cross-sectional areas of plies 82
6.2.4 Long joints 82
6.3 Riveted and bolted joints: geometrical and other general considerations 82
6.3.1 Minimum spacing 82
6.3.2 Maximunl spacing 82
6.3.3 Edge distance 83
6.3.4 Hole clearance 83
6.3.5 Packing 83
6.3.6 Countersinking 83
6.3.7 Long grip rivets 83
6.3.8 Washers and loclung devices 83
6.3.9 Intersections 83
6.4 Factored resistance of individual rivets and b o l t s other than HSFG bolts
conlplying with British Standards 83
6.4.1 Linuting stresses 83
6.4.2 Shear 84
6.4.3 Axial tension 84
6.4.4 Bearing 84
6.4.5 Combined shear and tension 84
6.5 High strength friction grip(HSFG) bolts 83
6.5.1 General 84
6.5.2 Ultimate l i t state (static strength) 85
6.5.3 Friction capacity 85
6.5.4 Serviceability linutstate (defornaon) 85
6.5.5 Prestress 85
6.5.6 Slip factor 85
6.6 Pinned joints 85
6.6.1 General 85
6.6.2 Solid pins 85
6.6.3 Members connected by pins 85
6.7 Welded joints 86
6.7.1 General 86
6.7.2 Effect of welding on static strength 86
6.7.3 Effect of welding on fatigue strength 86
6.7.4 Corrosion 86
6.7.5 Edge preparations 86
6.7.6 Dístortion 86
6.7.7 Infonnation given to fabricator 86
6.7.8 Butt welds 87
6.7.9 F'illet welds 87
--``,``,,``,````````,``````,,,,`-`-`,,`,,`,`,,`---

Page
6.8 Design strengthof welded joints 87
6.8.1 General 87
--``,``,,``,````````,``````,,,,`-`-`,,`,,`,`,,`---
6.8.2 Groups of welds 88

6.8.3 Linuting stress of weld metal 88
6.8.4 Limiting stress in the HAZ 88
6.9 Factored resistance of welds 88
6.9.1 Butt weld metal 88
6.9.2 Fillet weld metal 89
6.9.3 Heat-affected zones (HAZs) 92
6.10 Bonded joints 93
6.10.1 General 93
93 resistance 6.10.2 Factored
6.10.3 Tests 93
Section 7. Fatigue
7.1 Introduction 95
7.1.1 General 95
7.1.2 Influence of fatigue on design 95
7.1.3 Mechanism of failure 95
7.1.4 Potential sites for fatigue cracking 95
7.1.5 Conditions for fatigue susceptibility 95
7.2 Fatigue design criteria 95
7.2.1 Design philosophy 95
7.2.2 Fatigue failure criterion 9G
7.3 Fatigue assessment procedure 96
7.4 Fatigue loading 96
7.5 Stresses 98
7.5.1 Derivation of stresses 98
7.5.2 Stress parameters 98
7.6 Derivation of stress spectra 98
7.6.1 Cycle counting 98
7.6.2 Derivation of stress spectrum 106
7.7 Classification of details 106
7.8 Fatigue strength data 108
7.8.1 Classified details 108
7.8.2 Unclassified details 108
7.8.3 Low endurance range 108
7.8.4 Improvenlent techniques 108
7.8.5 Workmanship 108
Copyright British Standards Institution 5

Section 8. Testing
8.1 General 113
8.2 Preparation for test 113
8.3 Static tests 113
8.3.1 General 113
8.3.2 Application of loads 113
8.3.3 Acceptance criteria 114
8.3.4 Retests 114
114 measurement
resistance
8.3.5 Ultimate
fatigue for testingAcceptance
8.4 114
8.4.1 Objectives of test 114
8.4.2 Derivation
data of loading 114
8.4.3 Derivation of stress data 115
8.4.4of Derivation endurance data 1l G
8.4.5 Acceptance 116
8.5 Reporting 117
Appendices
A Nomenclature of aluminiun~products 118
B F o m d statenlent of safety factor fommt adoptedin the code for static
design resistance calculations 123
C m i c a l values of design life 124
D Derivation of material limiting stresses for use in design 124
E Elasto-plastic moment calculation 125
F HAZs aqjacent to welds 128
G General formulae forthe torsional propertiesof thin-walled open
sections 133
H Lateral torsional bucklingof beams 145
J Torsional buckling of struts: determinationof slenderness paranleter,1 147
K Equations to design curves 151
strength L Fatigue data 154
Thbles
2.1 Heat-treatable alloys 17
2.2 Non-heat-treatable alloys 19
2.3 Bolt and rivet material 21
2.4 Welding filler metals 22
2.6 Physical properties 22
2.6 General corrosion protectionof alminium structures 23
2.7 Additional protectionat metal-to-metal contacts to combat crevice and
galvanic effects 25
2.8 Selection of filler wires and rods for inert-gas welding 27
2.9 Product form availability 28
2.10 F h g e of sizes for extruded section complying withBS 1161 29
3.1 Load factors (based on building structures) 30
3.2 Load factors for combinedloads 31
3.3 Material factors 31
3.4 Limiting deflections 32
--``,``,,``,````````,``````,,,,`-`-`,,`,,`,`,,`---
G
O BSI 07-1999
~ ~~
STD*BSI BS 8118: PART 1-ENGL 1991 m Lb24bb9 0794517 T q 5 m

BS 8118 : Part 1 : 1991
Page
4.1 Limiting stresses, heat-treatable alloys 35
4.2 Linuthg stresses, non-heat-treatable alloys 36
4.3 Limiting values ofP 40
4.4 Curve selection for figure 4.5 (local buckling) 41
4.5 HAZ softening factor 44
4.6 Extent of HAZ, factor a 45
4.7 Lateral torsional bucklingof beams, coefficients X and Y 52
4.8 Effective length factor K for struts 54
4.9 Torsional buckling parameters forstruts 59
4.10 Choice of strut curve diagram 62
6.1 Limiting stress pf for alunkium fasteners 83
6.2 Limiting stresses of weld metal p , 89
6.3 Limiting stress P, and p , in the HAZ 89
7.1 Type 1 classifications: non-welded details 99
7.2 Type 2 classifications: welded details on surface of member 101
7.3 Type 3 classifications: welded details at end connectionsof member 103
7.4 Values of Kz and m in figure 7.9 108
8.1 Fatigue test factorF 117
A. 1 Nearest foreign equivalentsto designated wrought and cast alloys
complying with British Standards 121
c.1 Qpical values of design life 124
D.l Limiting stress P, for weld metal 125
F. 1 Modified HAZ softening factor4
F.2 General deternkation of IC, and 4 130
6.1 Specimen calculation: monosynunetric shape 138
6.2 Specimen calculation: skew-symmetric shape 142
6.3 Specimen calculation: asymmetricshape 143
H. 1 Effective length1 for beanls of length L 146
H.2 Effective length I for cantileverof length L 146
K. 1 Eauations to desim curves
v
152
Figures
4.1 Qpes of flat element 37
--``,``,,``,````````,``````,,,,`-`-`,,`,,`,`,,`---
4.2 Flat elements understress gradient, valueof g 38

4.3 B u c m modes for flat reinforced elements 38
4.4 Reinforced elements, value of h 39
4.5 Local buckling factor kL 42
4.6 Extent of HAZ, definition of z 45
4.7 Typical heat-path measurement - 46
4.8 Lateral torsional buckling, equivalent uniform moment M 50
4.9 Lateral torsional buckling of beams, bucklingstress p , 51
4.10 Column buckling stress P, for struts 55
4.11 Torsional buckling of struts, interaction factor k 63
4.12 Torsional buckling stress P , for struts G4
5.1 Unstiffened plate 69
5.2 Multi-stiffened plate 69
5.3 Plate girder 69

O BSI - Uncontrolled Copy
Provided by IHS under license with RSI 07-1999 Licensee=Rolls Royce Enterprise Wide/5973912035, User=Wootton, John 7
~ ~~ ~~
STD-BSI BS 8118: PART L-ENGL 3991 m Lb24bb9 07911518 981 m

BS 8118 :Part i : 1991
page
5.4 Elastic criticalshear buckling factor v1 75
5.5 Basic tension fieldshear buckling factorv2 76
5.6 Flange assisted tension fieldshear buckling factor v3 77
5.7 Shear buckling factorml 77
ction stiffener 5.8 Effective 78
5.9 Schematic
interaction diagrams
girders
plate for 81
6.1 Effective butt weld throats 87
6.2 Effective fillet weld throats 88
6.3 Failure planes for static welded joint checks 90
6.4 Butt weld design 91
6.5 Fillet weld design 91
6.6 Effective length of longitudmal fillet welds 92
6.7 Thick adhered shear test 93
6.8 Thin sheet test specimens 94
7.1 Fatigue assessment procedure 97
7.2 Stress paranleter for parent nlaterial 105
weld 7.3 Stresses in throats 105
7.4 Stress in lapped joints 106
7.5 Stresses in root of fillet 106
method counting cycle
7.6 Reservoir 107
7.7 Simplified stress spectrum 108
7.8 m i c a l &-N relationship 110
7.9 Designf,-N curves (for variable amplitudestress histories) 111
7.10 Method of identifkation of fatigue class of drawings 112
B.l Ultinmte linut state criterion 123
E.l Assunled elasteplastic stress patterns (non-hybrid) 127
F.1 Extent of HAZ, factor 9 132
F.2 Qpical hardness plot
along a heat
path
from a weld 132
6.1 Torsion constant coefficients
certain
forfillets
and
bulbs 134
6.2 Shear centre position(S) and warping factor(H) for certain thin-walled
sections 135
--``,``,,``,````````,``````,,,,`-`-`,,`,,`,`,,`---
6.3 Monosynunetric section notation 137

6.4 Skew-synmetric section notation 139
notation
6.5 Aspmetric section 141
J.1 Sections which exhibit no interaction between the pure torsional and
es buckling flexural 147
5.2 Monosymmetric section 148
5.3 Asymmetric section 149
5.4 Nonlogranl for solving cubic equationa? - + Ax - B = O 150
K.1 Buckling strength at high slenderness 151
L.l Zone of greatest variation in effectivef,-N curves 155
8
0 BSI 07-1999
STD.BS1 BS B11B: PART It-ENGL 1971 l b 2 4 b b 9 0774539 B38 m
BS 8118 :Part 1 : 1991
Foreword
This Part of BS 8118 has been prepared underthe direction of the Civil Engineering
and Building Structures S t a n h d s Policy Committee.BS 8118 is a document
combining a code of practice to cover the design and testing ofau l nMunstructures
(Part 1) and a specification for materials, fabrication and protection
(Part 2).
This Part of BS 8118 gives recomnlendations forthe design of the elenlents of framed,
alunmunl alloy.
lattice and stiffened plate structures, using wrought
Although BS 8118 is a revision of CP 118 it is written witha different design
philosophy. Because ofthis CP 118 will not be withdrawn immediately so that a period
of overlap in designprocedures can be allowed.
It has been assumed inthe draftmg of this British Standardthat the execution of its
provisions is entrusted to appropriately qualified and experienced people and
that
construction and supervisionis carried out by capable and experienced organizations.
The full list of organizationsthat have taken partin the work of the Technical
Committee is given on the inside front cover. The Chairman of the Technical
Committee is Dr P S Bulson CBE and the following people have made a particular
contribution in the drafting of the code.
Mr R J Bartlett
Mr M J Bayley
Mr P G Buxton
Dr M S G Culliiore
MrJBDwight
Prof. H R Evans
Mr K Ewing
Mr W Ferguson
Mr R A Foulkes
Mr J H Howlett
M r D Knight
Mr W I Liddell
Prof. D A Nethercot
Dr M H Ogle
Mr J A Thornton
Mr P BTindall
Compliance with a British Standarddoes notof itself confer immunity
from legal obligations.
Summary of pages
1 156, an inside
This docunlent conlprisesa front cover, an inside front cover, pages to
back cover anda back cover.
this document indicates whenthe
The BSI copyright notice displayed throughout
document was last issued.
Sideliningin this document indicatesthe most recent changes
by amendment.
--``,``,,``,````````,``````,,,,`-`-`,,`,,`,`,,`---

No reproduction or networking permitted BSI 07-1999
O without license from IHS Not for Resale, 07/16/2013 06:15:20 MDT 9
BS 8118 :Part 1 : 1991 Section 1
Section 1. General
1.1 scope 1.2.7 factored load

This Part of BS 8118 gives reconmendations for the A nominal load multiplied by the relevant partial load
design of the elements of franled, lattice and stiffened factor.
plate structures, using wrought aluminiumalloy. Where 1.2.8 factored life
castings or forgings are used they should be
manufactured and designedin accordance with the The design life multiplied bythe relevant partial life
appropriate British Standard and in close consultation factor.
with the specific manufacturer. 1.2.9 factored resistance
The design reconmendations are for a variety of The resistance of a member divided by the relevant
aluminium alloys suitable for structural use, and apply partial material factor.
--``,``,,``,````````,``````,,,,`-`-`,,`,,`,`,,`---
to a range of structures subjected to normal

atmospheric conditions such as bridges, buildings, 1.2.10 fail safe
towers, road and rail vehicles, nlarine craft, cranes and The ability of a structure to continue to be serviceable
offshore topside structures. after the discovery and monitoring of fatigue cracks.
The reconmendations do not cover aerospace alloys, 1.2.11 fatigue
the detail design of castings, curved shellstructures or The damage, by gradual cracking, to a structural
structures subjected to severe thermalor chenucal
member caused by repeated applications of a stress
conditions. They are not intended to be used for the that is insufficient to cause failure by a single
design of containment vessels, pipework, airborne application.
structures or naval vessels, or for any application for
which specific alternative codes exist, e.g.BS 5500 for 1.2.12 fusion boundary
pressure vesselsand BS 5649 for lighting columns. The material in a heat-affected zone inmediately
NOTE. The titles of the publications referred to in this standard a a c e n t to the leg of a weld.
are listed on the inside of the back cover.
1.2.13 heat affected zone
1.2 Definitions A zone in which there is a reduction in strength of
material in the vicinity of welds in certain classes of
For the purpose of this Part of BS 8118 the following aluminium alloy.
defintions apply.
1.2.14 imposed load
1.2.1 compact cross-section
All loadmg on a structure other than dead or wind
A cross-section that can develop the full plastic loading.
capacity, either in compression or bending, with no
reduction due to localbucklii of thin-walled 1.2.15 instability
elements. A loss of stiffness of a structure (usually sudden)that
1.2.2 design life limits its load-canying capability andin certain
instances can cause catastrophic failure.
The period in which thestructure or component is
required to perform safely, withan acceptable 1.2.16 lateral torsional buckling
probability that it will not require repairor withdrawal The bucklmg of a beam accompanied by a
from service. combination of lateral displacement and twisting.
1.2.3 designspectrum 1.2.17 lateral restraint
A tabulation of the numbers of occurrences of all the Restraint that limits lateral movement of the
stress ranges caused by loading events. compression flangeof a beam.
1.2.4 detailclass 1.2.18 limit state
A rating given to a detail which indicates its levelof Condition beyond whicha structure is unfit for its
fatigue resistance. intended use.
1.2.5 edge distance 1.2.19 loading event
Distance from the centre of a fastener hole to the A defined loading cycle which, for design purposes,is
nearest edgeof an element. assumed to repeat a given number of times.
1.2.6 effectivelength 1.2.20load spectrum
Length between pointsof effective restmint of a A tabulation showingthe relative frequenciesof
member, multiplied by a factor to take account of end loading events of different intensities ona structure.
conditions and loadmg.

10 O BSI 07-1999
~~
STD-BSI BS ALLB: PART L-ENGL 1991 m l b 2 4 b b 9 07911521 117b m
Section 1 BS 8118 :Part 1 : 1991
1.2.21 local buckling 1.2.34 stress range

Buckling of the thin walls of a component in (1) The greatest algebraic difference betweenthe
compression, characterizedby the fomwtion of waves principal stresses occurring on principal planes not
or ripples alongthe member. more than 45 O apart in any stress cycle on a plate or
element.
1.2.22Miner’ssummation
(2) The algebraicor vector difference between the
A cumulative fatigue danlagesumnution based on a greatest and least vector sum of stresses in any one
rule devised by Palmagren and Miner. stress cycle on a weld.
1.2.23nominalload 1.2.35 stress spectrum
The load to which a structure may be expected to be A tabulation of the numbers of occurrences of all the
subjected during nomml service. stress ranges of different magnitudes duringa loading
1.2.24 outstand element event.
The element of a section, composedof flat or curved 1.2.36 torsional buckling
elements, which is supported along one longitudinal Buckling of a strut accompanied by tw-.
edge, free along the other.
1.2.37 torsional/flexural buckling
1.2.25 reinforcedelement Buckl~ngof a strut accompanied by overall flexureas
The element of a section which is stiffened by the well as twisting.
introduction of longitudinal reinforcement, either along
the edge of the element, or within its width. 1.2.38 ultimate limit states
Those limit states which when exceeded can cause
1.2.26 resistance collapse of part or whole of a structure
The strength of a member based on calculations,using NOTE. Specific terms relating to limit state principles are defined
acceptable maximum values for material strength. in appendix B.
1.2.27 safe life
A design against fatiguein which the calculated life is 1.3 Major symbols
many times longer thanthe life required in service.
1.2.28 semi-compact cross-section A Area
A cross-section of a beam in whichthe stress in the or Durability rating
extreme fibresis limited to the 0.2 % proof stress,
because local bucklingof the compression elements A, section area
Effective
would prevent developmentof the full plastic moment A, Effective shear area
capacity.
a Spacing
of transverse stiffeners
1.2.29 serviceability limit states or Width of unstiffened plates
Those limit states which when exceeded can leadto B Overallwidth of multi-stiffenedplate
the structure being unfit for its intended use, even
though the structure has not collapsed. orDurability rating
1.2.30 slenderness BRF Factoredresistance inbearing of a fastener
The effective length of a strut divided by the radius of b Width
of flat
element
gyration. be Effectivewidthof webplate (plate girder)
1.2.31 stiffenedelements C Durability rating
The element of a section, composed of flat or curved
elements, which is supported along both longitudinal
or Lip size I
D Diameterofround tube to mid-metal
edges.
or Overall depth of web to outside flanges
1.2.32 stress cycle
d Depth
of web between
flanges
A pattern of variation of stress at a point, whichis
normally in the form of two opposing half-waves. or Depth of unstiffened plates
&c Nominal diameter of fastener or pin
1.2.33 stress history
A record showing howthe stress at a point varies E Modulus
elasticity
of
during loading. F Fatigue test factor
F Fusionboundary of heataffected zone (HAZ)
F, Frictioncapacity ofhigh strengthfrictiongrip
--``,``,,``,````````,``````,,,,`-`-`,,`,,`,`,,`---
bolt (HSFG bolt)
O BSI 07-1999 11
f Reductionfactor
applied M R S ~ Factoreduniaxialmonlentresistanceabout
to kZ
foc Constant
amplitudecut-off major axis (with allowance for shear)
stress
fov Variable
amplitude cut-off M R S ~ Factoreduniaxialmomentresistance about
stress
nlinor axis (with allowance for shear)
fr Design stress range Factored moment of resistance to lateral
fu Ultimatetensile stress (designated R, in torsional buckling
BS EN 10002-1)
M, Semi-compact value
of MRS
f0,2 Minimum 0.2 % tensileproof stress (designated
Rp0.2 in BS EN 10002-1)
M, Uniaxialmoment about nqjor axis
-
G Shear
modulus M, Equivalentuniformmomentaboutmajor axis
My Uniaxialmoment about n k o r axis
g Stress gradient
coefficient
My Equivalent uniform monlent about n k o r axis
gt Throatweld
of
g, Leg length of weld M1 Maximum factored monlent
H Warping factor M2 Minin~unlfactored nlonlent
h Reinforced
elements
coefficient m Inverse slope off, - N curve(fatigue)
or Distance to a free edge ml, m2 Shear buckling factors (plate girders)

N Numberof webs
IS Secondmomentof area of fullsection of
effective stiffener (plategirder) or Predicted cycles to failure (endurance)
ISU Secondmomentof area of one subunit of n Equivalentnumberofcyclesof stress range
plating (multi-stiffened plates) (fatigue)
Iy Secondmomentof area aboutcentroid axis or Time in days between welding and loading
J Torsion constant P Axialtensileorcompressiveforcedue to
K Effectivelengthfactorfor struts factored loading
KI Coefficientincalculationofresistanceofbolts or Protection
Kz Constantin
fatiguefailure
criterion PC. Elasticcriticalloadfortorsionalbuckling
kL Local buckling
coefficient P, Proofloadfor a bolt
k, Reductionfactoronlongitudinalresistance to PP Prestress
load
take account of high shear PR Factored axial resistancebasedonoverall
k, Strengthfactorfor HAZ material colunm or torsional buckling
Modified strength factor forHAZ material PRB Factoredresistance of butt weld
k; PRF Factoredresistance of filletweld
Length between supports PRFB Factored resistance of HAZ adjacent to butt
Effective length between lateral supports weld fusion boundary (direct normal tensile
Effective length ofbutt weld force)
Effective length of fillet weld PRFF Factored resistance of HAZ adJacent to fillet
weld fusion boundary (direct nomlal tensile
Moment under factored loading force)
Equivalent uniform moment PRG Factoredresistance of bondedjoint
Elastic critical uniform moment for lateral PRS Factored axial resistance(tensile or
torsional buckling compressive)
Mf Fully compact valueof MRS PRTB Factored resistance of HAZ adjacent to butt
MRF Reduced value of MRS for flanges only weld toe (direct nomml tensileforce)
MRS Factored moment resistanceof a section in the PRTF Factored resistance of HAZ adjacent to fillet
absence of shear weld toe (direct nomml tensile force)
Reduced factored moment resistanceof a Ph Factored axial resistance to overallcolunm
section to allow for shear buckling aboutn d o r axis
--``,``,,``,````````,``````,,,,`-`-`,,`,,`,`,,`---

12 O BSI 07-1999
STD.BSI BS 8118: PAKT 1-ENGL 17’91 D Lb211bbS 07911523 2119 D
Section 1 BS 8118 : Part 1 : 1991
PRY Factored axial resistance to overall column tC Thickness of thickest elenlent connectedby
buckling about minoraxis welding
PRZ Factored resistance of HAZ under direct te Effective throat thickness
loam Flange thickness
tf
Pa Linuting stress for local capacity (tension and Flange thickness
compression) t2
V Shear force under factored loading
P, Linuting direct stress in HAZ
VRFB Factored shear resistance of HAZ adjacent to
Pf Linuting stress for solid rivets and bolts butt weld fusion boundary
Po Linuting stress for bending and overall yielding Factored shear resistance of HAZ adjacent to
VRFF
Pof Limiting stress for flange material fillet weld fusion boundary
Pow Limiting stress for web material vRS Factored shear force resistance
PS Limiting stress for overall buckling stability VRTB Factored shear resistance of HAZ adjacent to
OT Lateral torsional buckling stress
butt weld toe
or Buckling stress for web treated as a thin VRTF Factored shear resistance of HAZ adjacent to
column between flanges fillet weld toe
Pt Weld penetration VRW Reduced value of VRS
p, Linuting stress in shear VRZ Factored resistance of HAZ in shear
p, Linuting shear stress in HAZ Vtf Tension field factor (plate girders)
p, Limiting stress ofweldmetal V1 Elastic critical shear buckling factor
pwl Stressarising at extremeedge of webdue to v2 Basic tension field shear buckling factor
localized force v3 Flange assisted tension fieldshear buckling
pw2 Stress arising at nud-point of webdueto factor
.localized force W Weld metal
pl Stress axis value of p s in strut curve diagran~ W Pitch of stiffeners in multi-stiffened plate
or Value of po for unwelded fully compact section Y Distance from centre of multi-stiffened plate to
Radius of curvature of curved internal centre of outermost stiffener
element, to nud-metal yc Distancefromneutral axis tomoreheavily
Minor axis radius of gyration conlpressed edge
Plastic section nlodulusof gross section,with yo Distancefromneutral axis to less heavily
no reduction for HAZ, local buckling, or holes compressed edge, or edge in tension
Extemal loading actions under factored Y1 Distancefromneutral axis to mostseverely
loading stressed fibres
Plastic modulus of effective flange section y2 Distancefromneutral axis to the compression
(plate girder) flange element in a bean1
Plastic modulus of net section 2, Elastic
modulusof
effective
section
Plastic modulus of net effective section Zn Elasticnlodulus of netsection
Factor on pl to allow for strut not meeting Zn, Elasticnlodulus of neteffectivesection
tolerances of straightness or twist z Distance the HAZ extends fromaweld
Toe of HAZ z, Basic
value
of 2
Thickness (Y Ratio of nlinimunl to nlaxinlunl shear stress in
Lesser of 0 . 5 ( t ~+ k)and 1.5t~ web (elastic stress distribution)
Thickness of thinnest element connectedby ur Modlfylng factor for extent of HAZ to allow
welding for elevated tenlperature
‘YS Coefficient in calculation of boltorrivet in
single shear
--``,``,,``,````````,``````,,,,`-`-`,,`,,`,`,,`---

No reproduction or networking O BSI 07-1999
permitted without license from IHS Not for Resale, 07/16/2013 06:15:20 MDT 13
ß Slenderness
parameter A Slenderness parameter for colunm buckling,
ßo Senu-conlpact h i t i n g value of ß torsional buckling, andlateral torsional
buckling
fi1 Fully conlpactlinutingvalue ofß
Slenderness ratioof strut about ninor axis
Yc Consequences of failure factor
M0-g factor for extentof HAZ to allow
Yf Overall
load factor for increased heat build-up
y f l , ya Partial load factors Elastic critical stress of element with
y~ Fatigue
life
factor reinforcement
Ym Material factor Elastic critical stress of element without
ymf Fatigue
materialfactor reinforcenlent
‘T1 Normal stress on weld under factored loading
YS Coefficient in calculation of frictioncapacity
250 T1 Shear stress perpendicular to weld axis
& constant (%) 72 Shear stress parallel to weld axis
PS Slip factor
--``,``,,``,````````,``````,,,,`-`-`,,`,,`,`,,`---

14
No reproduction or networking permitted without license from IHS Not for Resale, 07/16/2013 06:15:20 MDT O BSI 07-1999
Section 2. Properties and selection of materials
2.1 Designation of materials The choice of this alloy is based on a conlbination

The designation of wrought alunMum and aluminium of good physical properties anda good degree of
resistance to corrosion. It is available in most fornq
alloys for general engineering purposes used t inhis
standard is in accordance with the international 4-digit solid and hollow extrusions, plates,sheets, tubes and
classification system. Detailsof this system are given in forgings. Care should be taken in designto account
appendix A. Table A l in appendix A shows by cross for loss of strength in welded joints in the
heat-affected zone (HAZ).
reference the current and old British Standard
designations together withthe nearest equivalentIS0 @) AUoy 6061. An alternative alloy to 6082 is 6061,
and other foreign designations. (Al MglSiCu) of durability ratingB which has very
The designation for castings is in accordance with the similar properties with slight inlprovenlent in
forndility and surface finish.It is available in
system used in BS 1490 for aluminium alloy castings. extruded tabular form and mainly used for
The alloy temper designation used inthis standard is structures.
generally in accordance withthe IS0 2107 ‘alternative’ (c) AUoy 6063. In applications where strength is not
temper designation system. Detailsof t h system of paramount importance andhas to be
together with the former systemstill used for some
compromised with appearance,the alloy 6063
alloys and forms of nlaterials are given in appendix A. (Al MgO,7Si) of durability ratingB is preferred,
NOTE.To simplify the text and to avoid confusion, in sections because it combines moderate strength with good
four, five and six the temper designations M,TB, TF and TH are
not used. The equivalent temper designations F, T4,T6 and T8 durability and surface finish. Itis particularly
respectively are used. responsive to anodizing and sinlilar patented
finishing processes.Alloy 6063 has a lower strength
than 6082, and like the latter there is a loss of
2.2 Permitted materials strength in welded joints inthe HAZ. It is available
2.2.1 Extrusions, sheet, plate, drawn tube, in extrusions, tubes and forgings andis particularly
forgings and castings suitable for thin-walled and intricate extruded
sections. Itis used nlainly for architectural
--``,``,,``,````````,``````,,,,`-`-`,,`,,`,`,,`---
2.2.1.1 Standard materials applications such as curtain walling and window

2.2.1.1.1 G e n a l frames.
This Part of BS 8118 covers the design of structures (d) AUoy 7020.A further alloy whichis readily
weldable (although not restrictedto welded
fabricated from a rangeof aluniniun1alloys used in
conditions and tempers listed in tables2.1 and 2.2 and structures) is the medium strength 7 series
alloy 7020 (Al Zn4,5Mgl) of durability rating C. It has
***
commonly supplied to the specifications given in
BS 8118 : Part 2. better post-weld strength than the 6 series
due to its natural agem property. This material and
* *
The alloysare in two categories, the first of
heat-treatable alloysgiven in table 2.1 and described
others in the 7 ***
series of alloys are however
sensitive to environmental conditionsand its
in 2.2.1.1.2 and the second of non-heat-treatable alloys satisfactory performanceis as dependent on correct
in table 2.2 and described in2.2.1.1.3. methods of manufacture and fabrication as on
Castings should only be usedin load bearing structures control of composition and tensile properties.If
after both adequate testing and the setting of upquality material in the T6 condition is subjected to any
control procedures for productionof the castings has operations which induce cold work,such as
been performed to the approval of the engineer. The bending, shearing, punching, etc.the alloy may be
design rules of this standard should not be applied to made susceptible to stress corrosion cracking; it is
castings without close consultation withthe essential therefore that there be drect collaboration
nmufacturers thereof. between the engineer and the nmufacturer on the
2.2.1.1.2 Heat-treatable alloys intended use and the likely service conditions.This
alloy is available normally onlyin rolled forms and
The following alloys derive strength from heat simple extruded solid and hollow sections, though
treatment. forgings can sometimes be madeto special order.
(a) Alloy 6082. The commonestof these alloys is (e) AUoy LM25 Alloy LM25 (Al Si7Mg) of durability
the medium strength alloy, 6082,(Al SilMgMn) of rating B is a casting alloy with good foundry
durability ratingB (see 2.4.2) used usually in the characteristics, corrosion resistance and nlechanical
fully heat-treated condition, i.e.6082-T6, and used in properties. It is available in four conditions of heat
welded and non-welded structures. treatment in both sand and chill castings, and is
mainly used for architectural and food
nmnufacturing installations.

O BSI 07-1999 15
-
STD.BSI BS 8LLE: PART L-ENGL J751 D 1 b 2 4 b b 7 077452b T58 m

2.2.1.1.3 Non-heat-treatablealloys. The strongest 5 ***

series alloy which offers
inmunity to stress corrosion when exposed to
The following alloys derive enhanced strength only by
strain hardening. Theyare normally produced in sheet elevated temperature is 5454. The 5
alloys with greater than3 % Mg may be rendered
series ***
and plate forms and occasionally in some sinlple
extruded foms. susceptible to stress corrosion when exposed to
elevated tenlperatures.
(a) AUoy 1200.The alloy 1200 (Al99,O)of durability
rating A is ‘conunercially pure’aluminium with high (jjAlloy 5251 : in seam welded tube. Sean1 welded
ductility and a very good corrosion resistance. It is tubes are produced from 5251 strip (Al M@) giving a
used for architectural work where components are durability rating B to the tube, which has been
not highly stressed and is available insheet only. further strengthened by work hardening through
forming and finishing rolls.Its n& uses are in
(3)AUoy 3103.The alloy3103 (Al Ml) of durability
rating A is stronger and harder than‘commercially general engineering such as garden furniture,
handrails and ladders.
pure’ a ulnM um but with the same high ductility and
very good corrosion resistance, andis used (g) AUoy W 5 .Alloy LM5 (AlMg5Sil) of durability
extensively for building sheet and vehicle panelling. raking A is a medium strength casting alloy
It is available in sheet form. possessing excellent finishing properties where it
maintains a surface of high polish, but is only
(c) AUoy 3105.The alloy 3105(Al Mn0,5Mg0.5) of
suitable for simple shapes. Itis mainly used for sand
durability ratingA is becoming more prevalent in the castings for architectural and decorativepurposes
profied buildmg sheet market dueto its superior
and where anodizingis required.
properties over3103 in hardness and strength.It also
has an economic advantage. Availableform are (h) AUoy LM6. Alloy L M G (Al Sil2) of durability
linuted to sheet. rating B is a further mediuni strength casting alloy
which has excellent foundrychmcteristics, high
(d) A h y 5083.The alloy 5083 (Al Mg4,5Mn0.7) of ductility and impact strength, together with good
durability ratingA is used for weldedstructures, corrosion resistance. It is suitable for both sand and
plating and tank work, because it welds readily
chill castings and for a wide range of uses in
without sigruficant loss of strength andhas high general, marine and electrical applications and in
ductility. The tensile strengthof 5083 in the O and F
castings of above avemge complexity and size.
conditions is lower than 6082-T6 but sigrufcantly
higher if the latter is welded. However, subjectionto 2.2.1.2 Materials in other thicknesses and allogs
long exposure at temperatures above65 “C, it can with other standard and non-standard properties
result in grain-boundary precipitationof The alloys listed in tables 2.1 and 2.2 are sonletimes
nmgnesiunl/alunlinium intermetallic compounds used in other thicknesses andin other standard and
.which corrode preferentiallyin sonle adverse non-standard tempers and conditions. Guaranteed
environments. This effect is aggravated if the alloy is nlininlunl properties for such materials may be used if
subjected to subsequent cold working operations. It agreed between designer and client.
is available in plate, sheet, simple extruded sections,
drawn tube and forging. Apart from its easy welding 2.2.1.3 Other allous
and good formability properties, italso exhibits very Other alloys are available which offer higher strengths,
good durability, especially in nlarine environments. e.g. 2014A andor better post-weld strengths, e.g.7019,
(e) AUoys 5251, 5154A a.& 5454. Alloys 5251 but these strengths nlay be achievedto the detriment
(Al M@), 5154A (Al Mg3,5(A)) and 5454 (Al Mg3Mn) of other properties. The engineeris therefore, advised
all of durability ratingA are available in sheet, plate against using anyof these alloys without careful
and simple extrusions.5154A and 5251 are also consideration, and in full consultation with a reputable
available as forgings. Magnesium is the main nmufacturer. Properties to be considered include
addition and as a result the alloys are ductile in the durability, weldability, resistanceto crack propagation,
soft condition, but work harden rapidly. They have and behaviour in service. Other alloysin the 7
series having higher proof strengths suchas 7019 will
***
good weldability and very good resistanceto
corrosive attack, especially in a marine atmosphere. require particular control onnmufach~ringprocesses,
For this reason theyare used in panelling and for example control of micro structure, residual stress
structures exposed to marine atmospheres. 5154A and cold working, see 2.2.1.1.1 (d).
and 5454 are stronger than 5251.. 2.2.2 Bolts and rivets
Bolt and rivet materials togetherwith their durability
ratings are given in table 2.3. Guidance on the selection
of bolt and rivet materialsis given in 2.4.3.2.
--``,``,,``,````````,``````,,,,`-`-`,,`,,`,`,,`---

16
No reproduction or networking permitted without license from IHS Not for Resale, 07/16/2013 06:15:20 MDT O BSI 07-19‘99
Section 2 Bs 8118 : Part 1 : 1991
C
sY
W
3 l b
17
--``,``,,``,````````,``````,,,,`-`-`,,`,,`,`,,`---

Section 2 BS 8118 : Part 1 : 1991
4
I I
S!
B1
t
I
a lm Ia la
L
O B S I 07-1mcJ 19
Previous page is blank

--``,``,,``,````````,``````,,,,`-`-`,,`,,`,`,,`---

~ ~~
STD-BSI BS BLLB: PART L-ENGL L99L m L b 2 9 b b 9 07q9529 7b7 m

n m n n
d
Z Z
4
m m
z z z n
N
m m m m m
m m
E
c\Ic\I c\I
ck VI VI VI dl VI VI VI VI
--``,``,,``,````````,``````,,,,`-`-`,,`,,`,`,,`---

Provided by IHS under license with BSI - Uncontrolled Copy
O BSI 07-1999
No reproduction or networking permitted without license from IHS
page Previous is blank
Licensee=Rolls Royce Enterprise Wide/5973912035, User=Wootton, John
Not for Resale, 07/16/2013 06:15:20 MDT
21
These materials mayalso be used for special The mechanical propertiesof the alloys vary with
proprietary rivet and bolt products, including thread temperatwe and those given in tables 2.1, 2.2 and 2.3
inserts. should be applied to the design of structures over a
Special head shapes may be necessary for the larger temperature range -50 "C to 70 "C except for 5083
diameter rivets, see BS 1974l). (see 2.2.1.1.3 (d)). The 0.2 % proof stress and tensile
strength improveat lower temperatures,but at higher
2.2.3 Filler metals tenlperatures are reduced. For properties outside the
Filler metals for tungsten inert-gas (TIG) welding and temperature range given, the manufacturer shouldbe
metal inert-gas(MIG) welding, are given in table 2.4 consulted. The alloywill melt withinthe range 550 "C
on the
together with their durability ratings. Guidance to 660 "C, with the precise range dependenton the
selection of filler metalsis given in 2.5.3.2. alloy.
2.3.2 Physical properties
2 3 Strength, mechanical and physical The physical propertiesfor the standard alloys
properties although varying slightlymay be taken as constant and
are listed in table2.5. In critical structures the engineer
2.3.1 Strength and mechanical properties nlay wish to use the exact value which should be
The range of the standard alloys togetherwith their obtained froma reputable nlanufacturer.
available fornw, temper conditions and mechanical 'Igble 2.5 Physical properties
properties are shown in tables 2.1 and 2.2.
The mechanical properties for wrought materials for
Property I Value
the tempers and conditionsof the alloys given in Density 2 710 kg/m3
tables 2.1 and2.2 have been used to determine the Modulus of elasticity 70 O00 N/nun2
limiting stresses given in table 4.1. Where alloys are
welded the approximate percentage reductionin Modulus of rigidity 2G GOO N/nun2
strength of the alloy is given for each temper. These Coefficient of thermal 23 X per "C
strengths in the HAZ may not be achieved until after a expansion
period of natural or artficial ageing, see notes to
table 2.1for details. 2.4 Durability and corrosion protection
The strength of bolt and rivetmaterial is given in
table 2.3. 2.4.1 General
In many instances the standard nmterials listedin
I lbble 2.4 Weldingfiller metals tables 2.1 to 2.4 can be used in the ndl-finish, as
extruded or as welded condition withoutthe need for
Filler BS alloy IS0 alloy DurabilitJ surface protection.
metal designation?) rating
designation')
group The good corrosion resistanceof aluminium and its
alloys is attributable to the protective oxide film which
Qpe 1 1080A Al99,8 A forms on the surface of the metal inunediatelyon
1050A Al99,5 exposure to air. This film is normally invisible,
3103 Al Mn1 A relatively inert andas it forms naturally on exposure to
Qpe 3 air or oxygen, and in many complex environments
1 me 1
Qpe 5
4047A3)
4043A
505GA
I Al Si5 (A)
Al Si12
Al Mg5
(A) IB containing oxygen;the protective film is thw
self-sealing.
In mdd environnlents an alunWum surface will retain
its original appearance for years, and no protection is
5356 Al Mg5Cr(A) A needed for most alloys. In moderate industrial
5556A Al Mg5,BMnCr environments there will be a darkening and roughening
of the surface. As the atmosphere becomes more
5183 Al Mg4,5Mn aggressive such as in certain strongly acidicor strongly
l) See BS 2901 : Part 4 for chemical composition. alkaline environments,the surface discoloration and
?) Or nearest equivalent. roughening will worsen with visible white powdery
3, 4047A is specifically used to prevent weld metal cracking in
surface oxides andthe oxide film may itself be soluble.
joining involving high dilution and high restraint. In most cases The metal ceasesto be fully protected and added
4043A is refera able. protection is necessary. These conditions mayalso
occur in crevices due to high local acid or alkaline
conditions, but agentshaving this extreme effectare
relatively fewin number.
')Obsolescent standard
--``,``,,``,````````,``````,,,,`-`-`,,`,,`,`,,`---

In coastal and marine environments the surface will 2.4.3 Corrosion protection
roughen and acquire agrey, stonelike, appearance, and
2.4.3.1 Overall corrosion protection
--``,``,,``,````````,``````,,,,`-`-`,,`,,`,`,,`---
protection of some alloysis necessary. Where

aluninhm is immersed in water special precautions The need to provide overall corrosion protectionto
may be necessary. structures constructed from the alloys or conlbination
Where surface attack does occur corrosionhime curves of alloys listed in tables2.1, 2.2, 2.3 and 2.4 when
for aluninium and aluminium alloys usually follow an exposed to different environments (seePD 6484)is
exponential form, with a fairly rapid initial loss of given in table 2.6. The methods of providing corrosion
this there is
reflectivity after slight weathering. After protection in these environments are detailed in
very little further change over very extensive periods. BS 8112 : Part 2.
On atmospheric exposure,the initial stage may be a In selecting the appropriate colunm of table 2.6 for an
few months or 2 to 3 years, followed by little,if any) atmospheric environment there maybe localities
further change over periodsof 10,30 or even 80 years. within a region that have ‘nucroclinlates’ vastly
Such behaviouris consistent forall external freely different fromthe environmental characteristicsof the
exposed conditions and for all intemal or shielded region as a whole. A region designated ‘rural‘may have
conditions, except where extremesof acidity or local environments more closely resenlblingan
alkalinity can develop. Tropical environmentsare in industrial atmosphere at sites close to and down wind
general no more harmfulto aluminium than temperate of factories. Siilarly, a site near the sea but close to
environments, although certain alloys (seeBS 5500) are shore installations may, with the appropriate prevailing
affected by long exposure to high ambient winds, have the characteristics of an industrial, rather
temperatures, particularly whenin a n ~ e than marine, atmosphere. The environmentis not
environment. necessarily the sanle fora structure inside a building
as for one outside.
2.4.2 Durability of alloys
Because of these factors, localized conditionsof
The alloys listed in tables 2.1, 2.2, 2.3 and 2.4 are increased severitymay result. It is advisable to study
categorized intothree durability ratings A, B and C in the precise conditions prevailingat the actual site
descending order of durability. These ratings are used before deciding on the appropriate environment
to determine the need and degree of protection column of table 2.6.
required. In constructions employing morethan one
alloy, including filler metalsin welded construction, the Where hollow sections are employed consideration
protection should bein accordance with the lowest of should be given to the need to protect the internal void
their durability ratings. to prevent corrosion arising from the ingress of
corrosive agents. Becauseof the difficulty of painting
such sections, chemical conversion coatings may be
beneficial. Where the internal void is sealed effectively,
internal protectionis not necessary.
~~_____
rable 2.6 General corrosion protection of aluminium structures

~_____
I
I Protection needed according- to environment
~~
h o y ~1 Material I
I I
durability thickness
ratmg
Atmospheric 1 Immersed
mm Rural IndustriaUurban Marine Fresh water Sea water
Moderate Severe Non- Moderate Severe
industrial
IA I All I None I None IP I None I None IP I None I None I
B <3 None P P P P P P P
23 P
None None P
None None P P
C All None P’) P P P P PZ) NR
Ke?l
P Protection needed (see BS 81 18: Part 2).
P’)Requires only local corrosion protection to weld and HAZ in urban non-industrial environments.
P?) Protection not recommended if of welded construction.
NR Immersion in sea water is not recommended.

O
BSI 07-1999 Licensee=Rolls Royce Enterprise Wide/5973912035, User=Wootton, John
Not for Resale, 07/16/2013 06:15:20 MDT 23
S T S O B S 1 BS 8118: PART L-ENGL 1591 m 1b24bb7 0774532 2 5 1 m
2.4.3.2 Metal-to-metal contactsincluding joints 2.4.3.3.3 Contact with timber

Consideration shouldalso be given to contacting In an industrial, dampor nlarine environment the
surfaces in crevices and contact with certain metalsor timber should be primed and painted inaccordance
washings from certain metals which nlay cause with good practice.
electrochemical attack.of alunlinium (see PD 6484). Some wood preservatives nlay be harnuûlto
Such condtions can occur within a structure at joints.
Contact surfaces andjoints of alunlinium to a l u n ~ i u m aluminiun~As a general guidethe following
preservatives have been agreed betweenthe
or to other metals and contact surfacesin bolted, AlunIMun~Federation, the British Wood Preserving
riveted, welded and high strength friction grip(HSFG)
bolted joints should be given additional protection to Association and Danlp-proofing Associationto be safe
that required by table 2.6 as defined in table 2.7. Details for use with aluminiun~without special precautions:
of the corrosion protection procedure required are a) coal tar creosote;
given in BS 8118 : Part 2. b) coal tar oil;
2.4.3.3 Contact with othernon-metallic materials c) chlorinated napthalenes;
d) zinc naphnates;
2.4.3.3.1 Contact with concrete, masonry W plaster
e) pentachlorophenol;
Aluminium in contact with dense compact concrete,
masonry or plaster in a dry unpolluted or nuld f) organo-tin oxides;
environment should be coated on the contacting g) orthophenylphenol.
surface with a coat of bituminous paint, Where timber, treated withthe following preservatives,
see BS 8118 : Part 2. In an industrial or marine is used in damp situationsthe aluni ni un^ surface in
environment the contacting surfaceof the alununiunl contact with the treated timber should havea
should be coated withat least two coats of heavy duty substantial applicationof sealant:
bituminous paint;the surface of the contacting material
should preferablybe similarly painted. Submerged 1) copper napthanate;
contact between aluminiun~and such nlaterials is not 2) copperchrome-menate;
reconunended, but if unavoidable separation ofthe 3) bom-boric acid.
materials is reconunended by the use of a suitable Other preservatives should not be used in association
mastic or a heavy duty damp course layer. with alminiunl.
Lightweight concrete and similar products require Reference may be made to CP 143 : Part 15.
additional consideration when wateror rising danlp
can extract a steady supplyof aggressive alkali from Oak, chestnut and western red cedar, unless well
the cement. The alkali water can thenattack l alunIMun~.
seasoned, are likely to be h a r n ~to
aluminium surfaces other than the direct contact 2.4.3.3.4 Contact with soils
surfaces. The surface of the metal in contact with soil shouldbe
2.4.3.3.2 Embedment in concrete protected with a least two coats of bituminous paint,
The dunMun~ surfaces before embedmentin concrete hot bitumen, or plasticized coal-tar pitch,see BS 8118 :
should be protected with at leasttwo coats of Part 2. Additional wrapping-tapes nlay be usedto
bituminous paint or hot bitumen, see BS 8118 : Part 2, prevent mechanical danmge to the coating.
--``,``,,``,````````,``````,,,,`-`-`,,`,,`,`,,`---
and the coats should extend at least 75 nun above the 2.4.3.3.5 Immersion in water
concrete surface after embedment. Where au l nMun parts are inunersed in freshwater or
Where the concrete contains chloridese.g. as additives sea water including contanûnated water,the aluni ni un^
or due to the use of sea-dredged aggregate, at least should preferably be of durability rating A, with
two coats of plasticized coal-tar pitch should be fastenings of alunIMun~or corrosion-resisting steelor
applied in accordance with BS 8118 : Part 2 and the fastened by welding. Tables 2.6 and 2.7 give the
finished assembly should be overpainted locally with protection neededfor fresh water andsea water
the Same material, after the concrete has fully set, to inunelsion.
seal the surface. Care shouldbe taken where metallic
In addition the engineer should obtain competent
contact occurs betweenthe embedded alun Mun^ parts advice on the oxygen content, pH number, chenucal or
and any steel reinforcement.
metallic, particularly copper, content andthe amount
of nlovenlent of the water as these factors nlay affect
the degree of protection required.
-
24
115 m
m m
dr
M m
4 4
--``,``,,``,````````,``````,,,,`-`-`,,`,,`,`,,`---
O
Y

O BSI 07-1B9
--``,``,,``,````````,``````,,,,`-`-`,,`,,`,`,,`---
2.4.3.3.6 Contact with chemicals used in the Particular attention is drawn to the susceptibility
building industry of 6082,6063,6061 and5251 alloys to cracking during
Fungicides and mould repellents may contain metal solidification when weldsare made under constraint.
compounds based on copper, mercury, tin and lead This may be avoided bythe use of the filler nmterials
which, under wet or danlp conditions could cause and welding techniques recommended (seeBS 8118 :
corrosion of the alunMun1. The harmful effects may Part 2 : 1990). This will ensure a suitable combination
be countered by protecting the contacting surfaces of filler material in the actual weld.
whch may be subject to washmg or seepage from the 2.5.3.2 Filler metals.
chemicals. The filler wirefor use in welded construction should
Some cleaning materials can affectthe surface of the be chosen in accordance with table2.8.
alunMum. Where such chemicals are used to clean
aluminium or other materials in the structure, care
should be taken to ensure that the effects will not be 2.6 Selection of materials
detrimental to the aluminium. Often quick and The choice of an alloy or alloys for any structure is
adequate water rinsing will suffice, while inother determined by a combination of a number of factors:
situations temporary measuresmay be necessary to strength, see 2.3; durability, see 2.4; physical properties,
protect the aluni ni un^ from contact with the cleaners. see 2.3; weldability, see 2.5; formability, see 2.5 and
2.4.3.3.7 Contact with insulating materials used in availability, see 2.7 in both the particular fornl and
thÆ building industry alloy required. The standard nlaterials given in
tables 2.1 and 2.2 are described in terns of the above
Products such as glass fibre, polyurethane and various factors in 2.2.1.1.2 and 2.2.1.1.3.
insulation products may contain corrosive agents
which can be extracted under moist conditionsto the
detriment of the a l u m i n i u n ~ Insulating
. nlaterials should 2.7 Availability
be tested for compatibility with alunlinium under damp 2.7.1 General
and saline conditions. Where thereis doubt, a sealant
as described in BS 8118 : Part 2 should be appliedto The range of alloys given in tables 2.1 and 2.2 are not
the associated aluni ni un^ surfaces. available in all product forms. Table 2.9 indicates the
alloys available in particular product f o m and where
nlaterials may be stocked in liuted quantities. Product
2.5 Fabrication and construction and alloy combinations notnorndly manufactured but
2.5.1 General which may be manufactured by special arrangement
are indicated, design in thesenlaterials should only be
The fabrication and construction requirementsto be attempted after confurnationof their availabilitywith
detailed are included in the relevant design clauses. the materials supplier.
BS 8118 : Part 2 specifiesthe methods of fabrication to
be followed. In addition 2.5.2 and 2.5.3 should be 2.7.2 Structural sections
considered by the engineer. A number of structural extruded sections cornplying
2.5.2 Bending and forming with BS 1161 and some other structural sections are
available in 6082-T6 or 6063-T6 from stock, but in most
Alunwunl alloys are available in a wide range of instances they will need to be produced to order,
tempers which affect their formability. Where bending see table 2.9. Table 2.10 gives the range of sizes of
or forming is required the engineer should consultthe sections given in BS 1161. Other sizes may be obtained
manufacturer for guidance on the choice of alloy, from existingor new dies by arrangement with the
temper and any subsequent heat treatmentthat may be manufacturer. Where sectionsare produced to order,
required. minimm1 order quantities may be applied. Special new
2.5.3 Welding extruded sections are normally nude to order and the
low cost of simple dies gives great flexibilityin this
2.5.3.1 General design. The engineer should consultthe manufacturer
The loss of strength that can occur in the vicinity of at an early stageto verify the shape, thickness, size
the weld with some alloys and tempers should be and feasibility of the design of a new section and
considered by the engineer in the choice of the alloy delivery of both the new die and the extruded section.
or alloys to be used in welded construction. The Some sections or products are nmle by drawing,
engineer shouldsatisfy himself that the combination of forming or roll forming, these operations nlay require
parent and fillermaterials is suitable in regard to special tooling.
strength and durabilityfor the service conditions of the
shucture.

26
O BSI 07-1999
~ ~~
~~
STD-BSI BS BLLB: PART L-ENGL L771 m L b 2 4 b b 9 0794535 Tb0 W

hble 2.8 Selection of filler wires and rods for inert-gas welding
'arent metal combination')
T
~~
.st part
~
L200 7020 6061 i083

6063
6082
5556A Type 5
i083 m 5 me 5
5556A Type 5
il54A -5 me 5
i251 m 5 Type 5
1454 Type 5 Type 5
6082
} m 5
me
m 5
5
Type 4 5
Type 4
Type 4
--``,``,,``,````````,``````,,,,`-`-`,,`,,`,`,,`---
5556A
7020 m 5
m 5
1200
3103
3105
LM6
1
LM25
Castings
LM5
Castings
l ) Filler metals for parent combination to be welded are shown in one box, which is located at the intersection of the relevant parent.
metal row and column. In each box, the filler metal for maximum strength is shown in the top line; in the cm? of G and 7020
alloys, this will be below the fully heat-treated parent metal strength. The filler metal for maximum resistance to corrosion is shown
***
in the middle line. The filler metal for freedom from persistent weld cracking is shown in the bottom line.
1' NR = Not recommended. The welding of alloys containing approximately 2 % or more ofMg with AI-Si (5% to 12 % Si) filler metal
(and vice versa) is not recommended because sufficient MgxSi precipitate is formed at the fusion boundary to embrittle the joint.
3, The corrosion behaviour of weld metal is likely to be bett,er if its alloy content is close to that of the parent metal and not markedly
higher. Thus for service in potentially corrosive environments it is preferable to weld 5154A with 5154A filler metal or 5454 with 5554
filler metal. However, in some cases this may only be possible at the expense of weld soundness, so that a compromise will be
necessary.
'1 If higher strength and/or better crack resistance is essential, type 4 filler metal can be used.
NOTE 1. Table derived from BS 3019 : Part 1 and BS 3571 : Part 1.
NOTE 2. For paflicular filler metal alloys in each alloy type see table 2.4.

O BSI 07-1990
27
'T
-1
--``,``,,``,````````,``````,,,,`-`-`,,`,,`,`,,`---
Y
u
E

28
O BSI 07-1999
~~
STDOBSI B S 8238: PART I-ENGL 2991, lb211bb9 07911537 833 M

Table 2.10 Range of sizes for extruded sections 2.7.5 Forgings

comDlsing- with BS 1161
"
Forgings are supplied to order as hand forgings or die
Section type Range of size forgings, the former nornwlly requiring all over
machining to acheve the finished dinlensions whilst
nun the latter are produced to the frnished dinlensions.
Equal angles 30x30 to 120x120 Dies for forgingsare relatively expensive and costs
Unequal angles 50x38 to 140x105 should include at least one forging nmde andcut up to
check grain flow to prove the die for forgings usedin
Channels 60x30 to 240X 100 structural applications.
Tee-sections 50x38 to 120x90 2.7.6 Castings
I-sections 60x30 to 160x80 Castings are supplied to order as sand casting or chill
Equal bulb angles 50x50 to 120X 120 castings. Sand castingsare produced from patterns
Unequal bulb angles 50X37.5 to 140x105 made at moderate cost and are used nornlally for s n ~ l
quantity production. Chill castingsare generally used
Lipped channels 80x40 to 140x70 for larger quantity production and where greater
Bulb teesections 90x75 to 180x150 production rates are required, where greater
dimensional accuracy and good surface finish is
2.7.3 lbbe required. The cost of tooling may be high, especially
Tube may be produced by extrusion, by drawing or for pressure die castings.
seam welding. Tubeis available from stock in someof
these forms in a linuting range of sizes but generally it
will be made to order, see table 2.9.
2.7.4 Sheet, strip and plate
A wide nnge of sheet, strip and plateis normally
stocked in the standard alloys (see table 2.9). Some
alloys are available as patterned sheet and as
treadplatè. There is a wide range of standard rolled
roofing and cladding products, someof which are
available in moderate quantities from stockin both mill
finish and painted, but mostare generally produced to
order.
--``,``,,``,````````,``````,,,,`-`-`,,`,,`,`,,`---

Provided by IHS under license with BSI - Uncontrolled Copy O BSI 07-1999 Licensee=Rolls Royce Enterprise Wide/5973912035, User=Wootton, John 29
Section 3. Design principles
3.1 Limit state design Where possible they shouldbe detemined from the
Structures should be designedby considering the linut relevant British Standard. For dead and imposed
states at which they become unft for their intended
loading refer to BS 6399 : Part 1. For wind loadiig on
use. Considemtion should always be given to the buildings refer to CP 3 : Chapter V: Part 2. British
Standards also exist for nominal loads on cranes and
following linut states:
lifts (including dynamic effects). Whereno relevant
(a) static strength (ultimate linutstate) (see 3.3); British Standard exists nonlinal loads should be
@) defornmtion (serviceability linut state) (see 3.4); decided by the designer and the client. A method of
(c) durability (see3.5). assessing loads using a statistical and probability basis
is given in appendix B.
In certain structures it will be necessary to consider
one or both of the following: When the imposed load consistsof soil or other filling,
considemtion should be givento the material
(1) fatigue (see 3.6); becoming saturated. In assessing temperature effects it
(2) vibration (see 3.7). nmy be assumed that in the UK, in the absence of local
Design will nomlally be carried out by calculation i n f o d o n , the average internal temperatureof the
using the guidance given in sections 4 to 7 and structure varies between -5 "C and +35 "C. The effect
appendices B to L. It is permissible, however,to ver@ of the colour of extemal sheeting on intemal
a proposed design by testing (see section8). tenlperature shouldalso be considered.
--``,``,,``,````````,``````,,,,`-`-`,,`,,`,`,,`---
3.2.3 Factored loading
3.2 Loading Factored loads are used for checkingthe linut state of
3.2.1 General static strength.They are the nominal loads multiplied
by the overall load factor, yf, which provides an
A structure or structural component should be allowance for variability in loadmg, accidental
designed to resist all loads and actionsto which, overload, etc. yf is defined as follows:
within reason, it can be subjected. These are classihl
as follows. Yf = YflYa
where
(a) Dead load. Self-weight of the structure and of
any permanently attached item it supports. yf1 and are the partialloadfactors.
@) Imposed bad. Any statically or dynamically yfl is governed by the type of load, and y f allows
~
applied load other than dead or wind loading. some relaxation whena conlbination of imposed
andor wind loads is applied to the structure. As a
(c) Wind loud. Dynamic loading due to wind g u s t s . guide, tables 3.1 and 3.2 give valus of yfl and y f ~based
(d) Tempemture eflect. Temperature fluctuations on building structures, but different valuesnmy be
leading to forces in a structural component. used by agreement betweenthe designer and the
All relevant loads shouldbe considered separately or client. If different valuesare chosen by referenceto
in such realistic combinationsas to conlprise the most other British Standards,c m should be taken to ensure
critical effects onthe elements and the shvcture as a that y f l does not includea factor to allow for
whole. The magnitude and frequency of fluctuating variability of material strength. For initial designof
loads should also be considered. Particular attention simple structuresy f ~may be conservatively taken
should be givento loading conditions during assembly, as 1.0 for all imposed or wind loads.
and the settlementof supporting structures may need
to be taken into account. The possibility of loads due Table 3.1 Load factors (based onbuilding
to seismic forces, fire, explosion and vehicular impact structures)
should be considered. Type of load Yfl
3.2.2 Nominal loading Dead load
Nominal loads are defined as those to which the Direct effect 1.2
structure may be reasonably expected to be carrying
during normal service. Theyare used for checking the Countering overturningor uplift 0.8
limit m e s of deformation, fatigue and vibration. Imposed load (not including wind loads) 1.33
Wind load 1.2
Forces due to temperature effects 1.0

30
~~ ~~
~
STDmBSI BS 8118: PART 1-ENGL L991 D '1b211bb7 0794539 bob D

Table 3.2 Load factors for combined loads 3.3.3 Factored resistance
Load combination Yk-2
This is the calculated resistance dividedby the nlaterial
factor ym. The calculated resistance is the actual
Dead load 1.0 capacity of the component in relationto the
Imposed or wind load giving most severe 1.0 actioneffect being considered (axial load, bending
loading action onthe conlponent moment or shear force), basedon recognized
structural analysis and assuming satisfactory
Imposed or wind load giving second nlost 0.8 manufacture.
severe loading actionon the component
The material factor, ym, takes account of differences
Inlposed or wind load giving third most severe 0.6 between the strengths of material test specimens and
loading action of the component the strength of the actual material in the structure as
Imposed or wind load giving fourth nlost 0.4 nmufactured, and reflects possible doubtas to the
severe loading action onthe component soundnes of the component as built. ym should
NOTE. In sonle structures the wind load could be the most
normally be taken from table 3.3, but different values
severe applied load, in others the wind load could produce load may be used by agreement betweenthe designer and
effects less severe than those due to the mJor imposed loads. the client.
3.2.4 Dynamic effects Tbble 3.3 Material factors

In order to determine the nominal loading ona
structure under dynamic conditions, reference should
5 p e of construction I ym
Members Joints
be nlade if possible to an appropriate British Standard.
Forces from dynanuc effectsare treated as imposed Riveted and bolted 1.2 1.2
loads in table 3.1. I Welded I 1.2 I 1.3l)
I In other cases, should a 'dynamic magnification factor'
be used, the designer should be aware that this might Bonded I 1.2 1 3.0
be a dangerous procedureif the response of the For welding procedures which do not comply with BS 4870 :
structure is not taken into account.This applies Part 2. Y, should be increased to 1.6.
particularly to aluminium structures of high flexibility
that have a natural periodof vibration similar in Rules for establishingthe calculated resistance are
magnitude to that of the imposed load. given in sections four andfive (members) and section
six (joints). A method of assessing the calculated
If initial calculations showthat a problem exists, a resistance or the basis of statistics and probability is
more detailed computation based onthe equations of given in appendix B.
motion should be carried out. The need to provide
NOTE. In certain structures it is necessary to check that failure
artificial damping shouldbe examined, and tests on will not occur by overturning or sway failure.
prototype componentsmay also be necessary.
3.4 Deformation
3.3 Static strength
3.4.1 Recoverable elastic deformation
3.3.1 General
A structure is acceptable in terms of deformation if the
A component is acceptable in terms of static strength following is satisfied
if the following is satisfied
elastic deflection under limiting
Actioneffect under factored resistance nominal loading deflection
factored loa- (see appendixB)
It is permissible, when different combinationsof
3.3.2 Action-effect under factored loading imposed loading are possible, to assume a reduced
This is the axial force, bending momentor shear force loading equal to ya X nominal loads, whereyn is given
arising in a component due to the application of in table 3.2.
factored loading, foundby using accepted structural The calculation of elastic deflection should generally
analysis. The factored loadingis found by taking the be based on the properties of the gross cross-section.
nominal loads and multiplying each by the appropriate However, for slender sections itmay be necessary to
load factor. take reduced section propertiesto allow for local
buckling (see section4).
--``,``,,``,````````,``````,,,,`-`-`,,`,,`,`,,`---

O BSI 07-1999
-~ ~~
STD-BSI BS ALLB: P A R T L-ENGL 1771 W 1b2qhb7 07745'iO 328 m
The linuting deflection should be based on the relevant 3.6 Fatigue

British Standard, or agreed between the designer and
the client. In the absence of such information table3.4 3.6.1 General
gives suggested values for certain typesof structure. In Any structure or structural conlponent which is subject
setting linuting deflections it is important to realise that to signifcant variations in load should be checked for
dunmum is three times as flexible as steel, so unduly fatigue. In general two possible linlit states should be
s n d limiting deflections should be avoided. considered:
a) total collapse;
'hble 3.4 Limiting deflections 1 b) stable crack growth (danlage tolerant).
Element Recommended
deflection limit In both cases the design load spectrum (unfactored)is
(see note) assunled to act.
Cantilevers carrymgfloors LI180 3.6.2 Total collapse
Beams carrying plasteror other LB60 The procedure for considering this limit state is to
brittle finish determine the predicted life in accordance with section
seven, and checkthat this is not less than the design
Purlins and sheetingrails: life. In certain circunlstancesthe designer may wish to
(a) under dead load only LBO0 increase the nonunal design lifeby nwltiplying by a
(b) under worst combination LI100 factor (the fatigue life factor) y~ (>1). The choice of n,
of dead, imposed, wind and could be influenced by the following:
snow loads (a) the possibility of increasing crack growth during
the later stages of the life of the detail;
Curtain wall mullions and
transoms: (b) the accuracy of the assunled loading spectrum;
(a) single glazed LI175 (c) whether records of loading will be kept during
the life of the detail;
(b) double glazed LI250
(d) the possibdity of a change of use of the structure
Tops of columns: horizontal LI300 in mid-life.
deflection The designer mayalso wish to apply a fatigue material
NOTE. L is the length between SUDDOT~S. factor, ymf, to the design stress range given in
figure 7.9. The stress range would be divided by ynlf
3.4.2 Permanent inelastic deformation (> l ) ,and the choice of ymf could be influenced by the
It may be generally assumed that components, whose following
static strengthhas been calculated in accordance with ( 1 ) the need for the detail to exist in a very hostile
section four,will not suffer sigruficant permanent environment;
deformation under actionof nominal loading. This (2) whether failure of the detail will result in failure
applies to all alloy groups. of the entire structure, or whether alternative load
3.4.3 Distortion due to frequent assembly paths exist.
In certain structures which have to be assembled and 3.6.3 Stable crack growth
disassembled frequently, itis necessary to consider the Damage to a structure under fatigue conditionsis
possibility of changes in major dimensionsof the assessed by monitoring the rate of growth of fatigue
coupling system, leadingto the gradual build-up of cracks by inspection at regular intervals. Methods of
unacceptable errors in the assembled shape. inspection, allowable limiting crack lengths, allowable
rates of crack growth, andthe tinle between
3.5 Durability inspections should be agreed betweenthe client and
The durability rating of alloy groups is given in the designer. Crack growth is stable when the
allowable rate of crack growth does not suddenly
--``,``,,``,````````,``````,,,,`-`-`,,`,,`,`,,`---
tables 2.1 to 2.4. If a structure is designed in a durable

alloy and protected in accordance with BS 8118 : increase between inspections.
Part 2, it w i be deemed &factory. The degree of
l NOTE. Methods for calculating crack growth and limiting crack
length are outside the scope of this code, but the ease with which
exposure and the design l i e should be taken into a detail can be inspected for cracks can influence the choice of
consideration. ymf (see 3.6.2).

O BSI 07-1999
3.7 Vibration 3.8 Testing
For certain structures the possibility of undesirable Structural conlponents designedin accordance with
vibration under nornd service conditions should be sections 4 to 7 and the appropriate appendicesare
considered. In checking for the inconlpatibility of acceptable without testing. Conlponents designed using
vibration amplitudes nominal loads should beused. If other calculation nlethods, and conlponents not
vibration is thought to be a potential problem, the amenable to calculation, are acceptable only if their
possibility of fatigue failure shouldalso be checked resistance has been verified by testing. Such testing
(see 3.6). should be carried out in accordance with section 8.
--``,``,,``,````````,``````,,,,`-`-`,,`,,`,`,,`---

Provided by IHS under licenseO with BSI - Uncontrolled Copy
33
Section 4. Static design of members
4.1 Introduction 4.1.4 Advanced design

4.1.1 General Members can be safely designed usingthe
recommendations of this section andthe appropriate
All members should satisfy the linut states of static
strength and of deformation. Deformationis covered appendices. Other appendices providea fuller
treatment of certain specificaspects of member
in 4.9.
behaviour, and their use may leadto lighter designs.
Where reference is made to design curves, itis
pernwible instead for the designer to use formulae
from which the curves are derived (see appendixK). 4.2 Limiting stresses
Members are usually formed of extrusions, plate,sheet, Resistance calculationsfor members are made using
tube or a combination of these. The rules belowdo not assumed linuting stresses as follows:
apply to castings, and designers wishingto employ
castings should do so in close consultation withthe P, is the linutmg stress for bending and overall
manufacturers thereof. yielding;
4.1.2 Limit state of static strength pa is the linuting stress for local capacity of the
The factored resistanceof a member to a specific section in tension or compression;
actioneffect should not be lessthan the magnitude of pv is thelinuting stress in shear;
that actioneffect arising under factored loading.
P, is the linuting stress for overall buckling
Rules for obtaining resistanceto different actions are staJ3ility.
given as follows:
(a) for bema (resistance to moment and shear Values of po,pa and pv depend on the material
force) (see4.5); properties and should be takenas in table 4.1 or 4.2.
(b) for ties (resistance to axial tension) (see 4.6); For materials not covered in these tables referto
(c) for struts (resistance to axial compression) appendix D.
(see 4.7). Values of P, should be determined in accordance
The procedure for calculatingthe interaction between with 4.5.6.5 or 4.7.6.
moment and axial load in members subject to
combined actions is given in 4.8.
4.3 Section classification and local
The formulae given contain limiting stresses (po, pa,
h)related to material properties, which should be buckling
taken in accordance with4.2. They also contain the 4.3.1 General
material factory,,, which should be read from table3.3.
The resistance of a member may be reduced as a 4.3.1.1 Section classmeation
result of local buckling, dependingon the slenderness Resistance of members under momentor axial
of its cross section. A proposed design is checked compression may become reduced by local buckling, if
(except for a member under axial tension)by the slenderness of their component elementsis high.
c l a s s i i g the section in terms of its susceptibility to The first step in checking such members is to establish
this type of failure. A method for checking the local the section classification, i.e.the susceptibility to local
buckling, including sectionclassikation, is given buckling. In order to do this, and also to allow for the
in 4.3. effect of local buckling (when necessary),the designer
4.1.3 Heat-affected zones ( W s ) should considerthe slenderness of the individual
elements comprising the section.
Structural aluminium materialg e n e d y becomes
weakened in the heat-affected zone (HAZ) adjacent to 4.3.1.2 mpes of element
welds, and this should be allowedfor in the design. The following basic typesof thin-walled elementare
This does not apply when the parent material is in identified in these rules:
the O or T4 condition; or when it is in the F condition
(a) flat outstand element;
and design is based on O-condition properties.
Rules for estinlatingthe severity and extentof HAZ @) flat internal element;
softening are given in 4.4. Subsequent clauses then (c) curved internal element.
show how to allow for the effect of this softening on These are often unreinforced, i.e. not longitudinally
member resistance. stiffened (see figure4.1 (a)). The stabilityof flat
It is important to realize that a small weld, as used for elements can be greatly improved by the provision of
--``,``,,``,````````,``````,,,,`-`-`,,`,,`,`,,`---
example in connectmg a small attachment,may longitudinal stiffening ribsor lips, see figure 4.1 (b), in
considerably reducethe resistance of a member, due to which case the elements are referred to as reinforced.
softening of part of the crosssection. In beams it is
often beneficial to locate welds in low-stressareas,
i.e. near the neutral axis or away from the region of
peak monlent.

~~
~
STDmBSI BS 8118: PART 1-ENGL 1991 m l b 2 q b b 9 079q5q3 03'7

1 ' 1 rable 4.1 Limiting stresses, heat-treatable alloys

dloy Condition 'roduct TThickness I lLimiting stress
Up to and DO 0, Dl,
including
mm NhUn2 N/nun2 N/nun2
T6 Extrusion 150 140 260 145
TG Drawn tube 6 240 265 145
10 225 260 135
T4 Extrusion 150 65 35 40
T4 Drawn tube 10 35 120 60
T4 Forgings 150 50 100 50
T5 Extrusion 25 110 130 G5
T6 Extrusion 150 160 175 95
T6 Drawn tube 10 180 190 110
T6 Forgings 150 160 170 95
i082 T4 Extrusion 150 115 145 70
--``,``,,``,````````,``````,,,,`-`-`,,`,,`,`,,`---
T4 Sheet 3 115 145 70

T4 Plate 25 105 140 65
T4 Drawn tube 10 105 140 65
T4 Forgings 150 115 145 70
T6 Extrusion 20 255 275 155
150 270 290 160
T6 Sheet 3 255 275 155
T6 Plate 25 240 265 145
TG Drawn tube G 255 280 155
10 240 275 145
T6 Forgings 120 255 275 155
7020 T4 Extrusion 25 185 230 110
T4 Sheet, plate 25 160 205 95
T6 Extrusion 25 280 310 170
T6 Sheet, plate 25 270 295 160

O BSI - Uncontrolled Copy
Provided by IHS under license with BSI 07-1999 Licensee=Rolls Royce Enterprise Wide/5973912035, User=Wootton, John 35
~~~ ~
Table 4.2 Limiting stresses, non-heat-treatable all IS
7Thickness
"
T
Alloy Condition Product
--``,``,,``,````````,``````,,,,`-`-`,,`,,`,`,,`---
Over Pa i7 r.
including
"
nun N/mnl2 N/n&

1200 H14 Sheet 0.2 95 55
3103
3105
H14
H18
H14
Sheet
Sheet
Sheet
0.2
0.2
0.2
312*5
3
I :i145
120
150
150
G5
90
85
H16 Sheet 0.2 3 170 175 100
H18 Sheet 0.2 3 190 200 115
5083 o, F Extrusion 150 105 150 G5
O Sheet, plate 0.2 80 105 150 G5
O Drawn tube 10 105 150 G5
F Sheet, plate 3 25 130 170 75
H22 Sheet, plate 0.2 6 235 270 140
H22 Drawn tube - 10 235 270 140
I
5154A o, F Extrusion - 150 G5 100 40

O Sheet, plate 0.2 G 65 100 40
O D r a m tube - 10 G5 100 40
H22 Sheet, plate 0.2 G 160 200 85
H24 Sheet, plate 0.2 6 225 250 135
H24 Drawn tube - 10 200 220 180
5251 F Welded tube 0.8 1.0 220 230 130
H22 Sheet, plate 0.2 3 125 155 75
H24 Sheet, plate 0.2 5 175 200 105
5454 o, F Extrusion - 150 65 100 10
O Sheet, plate 0.2 3 60 j5 35
H22 Sheet 3.2 3 180 !15 110
H24 Sheet 3.2 3 200 !35 120

36
O BSI 07-1999
Section 4 BS 8118 : Part 1 : 1991
--``,``,,``,````````,``````,,,,`-`-`,,`,,`,`,,`---
I I
Key
o : outstand
1 : internal
(a) Unreinforced @) Reinforced
Figure 4.1 mpes of flat element
4.3.1.3 Shear webs from the elastic neutral axis, although in checking
The buckling of shear webs is treated separately whether a section is fully compact it is pernlissible to
(see 4.5.3.3 and also section 5). use the plastic neutral axis.
4.3.2 Slenderness parameter ß 4.3.2.3 Reirtforcedjlat elements
W o possible buckling modes should be considered as
4.3.2.1 General follows (see figure4.3, and separate ß values found for
The susceptibilityto local buckling of an element in a each
bean1 (nlonlent resistance)or in a strut (axial force (a) mode 1 : the reinforced element buckles as a unit
resistance) depends onthe paranleter ß as defined talang the reinforcement with it;
in 4.3.2.2 to 4.3.2.5.
(b) mode 2 : the sub-elenlents comprisingthe
4.3.2.2 Unreidorcedjlat elements reinforced elenlent thenlselves buckle as individual
The paranleter ß depends onb/t or U t for the element elenlents the junctions between themstaymg
concerned, where t is the elenlent thickness, b the straight.
width of an element generally, andd the depth of a For mode 2 buckhg ß is found separately foreach
web element in a beam. b and d should be taken as sub-elenlent in accordance with 4.3.2.2. For mode 1 it
the flat elenlent width, measured where relevantto the is generally determinedas follows (but see the note
springing of a fillet or to the toe of a weld. to 4.5.2.1, concerning outstand elenlents in beanls).
ß is defined as follows: (a) Mode 1, umform conlpression.
(1) Standard reinforcement, defined as
(a) elenlentunder uniforn~conlpression: /3 = b/t;
reinforcenlent consisting of single-sided rib or lip
@) elenlent understress gmdient: of thickness equalto the element thckness t,
(I) internalelementwith a stress ß = 0.wt located as in figure 4.4 :
gradient that results in a neutral axis at or
I the centre: 0.4b/t
ß = hb/t
where
(2) forany other stress gradients /3 = gb/t or
gdt b and t are defined as in 4.3.2.2
where g is the stress gradient coefficient and is read h is read
from
figure 4.4 (a), (b) or
from figure 4.2. In figure 4.2 yc and yo are the distances (c) as appropriate.
from the neutral axis of the gross sectionto the more
heavily conlpressed edge and the other edge For figure 4.4, c should be takenas the clear
respectively of the element, taken positive towardsthe depth of the rib or lip measured to the surface of
conlpression side.They should generally be measured the plate

O
37
~
STD-BSI BS 8118: PART L-ENGL 1991 D Bb24bb9 079454b 8llb

BS 8118 : Part 1 : 1991 Section 4
(2) Non-standard reinforcenlent.With any other 4.3.2.4 Curved internal elements

shape of reinforcenlent ß should be foundby For a shadow curved element underuniform
replacing it withan equivalent rib or lip of the compression, ß should be determinedas follows:
standard form and proceeding as in (1). The value
of c for the equivalent rib or lip is chosen so that
its second moment of area about the nud-planeof b/t
the plate is the sanle as that for the true = [1+ (0.006b4/RZi2]
reinforcement. where
(3) General method. For cases not covered by (1) R is the radius of curvature to nud-nlew
or (2) ß nlay be taken as follows:
b is the developed width of element at nud-metal
P = WO(~cdacr>o’4 t is the thickness
where
For shallow curved elements undera stress gradient, a
acr are the elastic
critical stresses, more favourable valueof ß may be taken, obtained by
and
assunling
simple
edge
support,
with factoring the above value byg as found from figure 4.2.
acro and
without the reinforcement. The above treatmentis valid, providedR/b is not less
(b) Mode 1, stress-gradient. tha O.lb/t. Sections containing more deeply curved
elements require special study.
ß should be foundusing the expression in (a) (3)
where acrand acronow relate to the stress at the
more heavily conlpressed edge of the elenlent.
1 .o
9
0.5
I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I
I I I I I I
-2 -1.5 -1 -0.5 O 0.5 1 .o

Yo /Y,
NOTE.For internal elements or outstands (peak compression at root) use curve A.

For outstands beak compression at toe)use line B.
Figure 4.2 Flat elements under stress gradient, value of g
@I
Figure 4.3 Buckling modes for flat reinforced elements
--``,``,,``,````````,``````,,,,`-`-`,,`,,`,`,,`---

38
Provided by IHS under license with BSI - Uncontrolled Copy O BSI 07-1999
STDmBSI BS 8118: PART 1-ENGL 1 9 9 1 m Lb24bb90794547 782 9
V
O
c
c O
--``,``,,``,````````,``````,,,,`-`-`,,`,,`,`,,`---
u)
EII'
O
c:

O ßSI 07-1999 Licensee=Rolls Royce Enterprise Wide/5973912035, User=Wootton, John
39
STD*BSI BS BLLB: PART L-ENGL L931 L b 2 4 b b 9 079q548 b19
BS 8118 : Part 1 : 1991 Section 4
--``,``,,``,````````,``````,,,,`-`-`,,`,,`,`,,`---
4.3.2.5 Round tubes Table 4.3 Limiting values ofß

ß should be found as follows, with no distinction Elements ßo P1
between axial compression and bending:
Unwelded Welded Welded Unwelded
ß=3 (m)%
Outstand 7E GE GE 5E
where elements
D is the dianleter to nud-metal;
Internal 22E I& 1 8 ~ 15 E
t is the thickness. elements
4.3.3 Section classification NOTE 1. The quantity E should generally be taken as follows
(except for certain flange elements in beams, see 4.3.3.5):
4.3.3.1 General E = (250/p0)"
The procedure is to classe the individual elements where

po is the liniiting stress (in N/mm2) (see tables 4.1 and 4.2).
comprising the section, exceptfor any element
stressed wholly in tension. The classification ofthe NOTE 2. An element is considered as welded if it contains
welding at an edge or at any point in its width. When the
section is then taken as that for the least favourable stability of a particular cross-section of a meniber is evaluated,
element. Individual elementsare classified in however, it is permissible to consider an elenlent as unweldcd if
accordance with4.3.3.4 or 4.3.3.5. it contains no welding at that section, even though it is welded
elsewhere along its length.
4.3.3.2 Sections: beams and struts NOTE 3. In a welded element the classification is independent of
For the section of a beam (moment resistance)or of a the extent of the HAZ.
strut (axialforce resistance) the following
classications apply. 4.3.3.5 Understressedjlange elements
A more favourable classification mayif desired be
(a) Moment resistance:
taken for flange elements in members under bending,
(1) fully compact local buckling can be ignored; or bending with axial force,that are both:
(2) senu-conlpact: the section can develop a a) parallel to the axis of bending; and
moment equal to po times the elastic section b) less highly stressed than the most severely
modulus; stressed fibresin the section.
(3) slender: the moment resistance is reduced byFor these itis permissible, in using table 4.3, to take a
premature local bucklingat an extreme fibre modified value of E as follows:
stress below P,.
E = (2501Jdp& Ih
(b) Axial compression resistance: where y1 and y2 are the distances from the neutral
(1) compact: local bucklingcan be ignored axis of the gross section to the most severely stressed
(2) slender: local buckhg lowers the resistance.fibres and to the element respectively. They should
generally be measured from the elastic neutral axis,
4.3.3.3 Sections subject to combined actions although in checking whethera section is fully
For the classification of sections requiredto carry compact it is pernksible to use the plastic one.
biaxial bending, or simultaneous bendmg with axial 4.3.4 Local buckling
force, see 4.8.2.1. 4.3.4.1 General
4.3.3.4 Element classtfication The possibility of local buckling in members classified
The classificationof an individual element depends on as slender is generally allowed for by replacingthe
the value ofß (see 4.3.2) as follows: true section by an effective one. The effective section
is obtained by employing a local buckling coefficient
(a) elements in beams (moment resistance): k~ to factor down the thickness, this being applied to
any uniform thickness slender elementthat is wholly
ß 5 P1 fully compact
or partly in compression. Elementsthat are not
ßI < ß 5 ßo senu-conlpact uniform in thickness require special study.
ß>ßo slender 4.3.4.2 Determination of kL
The coefficient kL, which is found separatelyfor
@) elements in struts (axial resistance): different elementsof the section, is read from the
ß 5 ßo compact appropriate curvein figure4.5 selected in accordance
ß > bo slender with table 4.4 .In order to select the correct curve the
value of ß/E should be determinedas follows:
where ßo and ßI are as given in table 4.3.
ß is found as in 4.3.2;
E = ( 2 5 0 / ~generally
~)~ (but see note 3 of 4.5.2.3
for bean1 con7pression &anges);

40
O BSI 07-1999
~
STD-BSI BS BLLB: PART L-ENGL L771 D fb2qbb7 O794549 555 m

--``,``,,``,````````,``````,,,,`-`-`,,`,,`,`,,`---
where This applies when the resistanceof a member is

po is the linuting stress for material ( i N/nun2), governed by pa or P , rather than P,. To find k, for
regardless of HAZ effects. nuterials not covered in table 4.5 see appendix F'.
I a b l e 4.4 Curve selection for figure 4.5 (local 4.4.2.2 7020 material
buckling) The alternative IC, values given in table 4.5 for 7020
Elements Unwelded I Welded material should normally be applied as follows,
according to the nature of the stress acting on the HAZ
Flat outstand curve A curve B nuterial:
elenlents (a) value (A): tensile stress acting transversely to the
Internal elements curve C curve D axis of a butt or fillet weld;
(flat or curved) (b) value (B): any other stress condition, i.e.
Round tubes Lower of Lower of longitudinal stress, transverse conlpression, shear.
curves C and curves D and It is sometinles pernkible to increase value (A) to a
E E figure above that in the table, depending on the degree
I NOTE. &e note 3 to table 4.3 I of themlal control exercised during fabrication (see
appendix F').
In order to decide whether an element should countas
unwelded or welded in table 4.4,refer to note 2 to 4.4.2.3 Recovery time for heat-treated alloys
table 4.3. The k, values given in table 4.5are valid from the
In the case of reinforced flat elements it is important following times after welding, provided the material
to consider both possible modes of buckling (see has been held at a tenlperature not less than15 "C:
figure 4.3) and take the more critical. In the case of
mode 1 buckling the factor k~ should be applied to the (a) 6 **
*series alloys 3 days;
area of the reinforcement as well as to the basic plate
thickness.
(b) 7 **
*series alloys 30 days.
4.3.4.3 Sections subject to combined actions In d e t e r n m g the resistance of components that are
to be loaded sooner than this, but not less than 24 h
For the determinationof k~ in sections required to after welding, the value of k, should be reduced by a
carry biaxial bending, or simultaneous bending with factorf found as follows:
axial force,see 4.8.2.2.
4.4 HAZ softening adjacent to welds

(1) G
series alloys
***
f = 0.9 + 0.1 ((71 - 1)/2]"'
(2) 7 ***
f = 0.8 + 0.2 ( ( n- 1)/29]"
I ~ ~ ~design nto allow~for the ~softening~ that i
usually occurs in the vicinity of welds. The region
series
n alloys
worst affected extends inmediately around the weld, where

beyond which the material properties rapidly improve n is the t h e (in days) between welding and loading.
to their M1 parent values. The softening affects the If the material is held at a temperature below15 "C
0.2 % proof stress more severely than the tensile after welding, the recovery time will be prolonged and
strength. advice should be sought.
For design purposes itis acceptable to approximateto 4.4.3 Extent of HAZ
the true con&tion by a s s u n ~ gthat around each weld
there is a zone, the HAZ, in which strength properties 4.4.3.1 Definition of z
are reduced by a constant factor&. Outside this zone The HAZ is assunled to extend a distance z in any
it is assunled that the full parent propertiesapply. The direction from a weld, measured as follows:
severity of the softening in theHAZ, as defined by h,
is covered in 4.4.2. The extent of the HAZ, defined by (1) transversely from the centre-line of an in-line
a distance z from the weld, is considered in4.4.3. butt weld (see figure 4.G(a));
It is sonletinles possibleto nutigate the effectsof HAZ (2) at fillet welds, transversely from the point of
softening by means of artificial ageing applied after intersection of the welded surfaces (see
welding (see appendixF'). figures 4.G(e),O,(g) and0));
4.4.2 Severity of softening
(3) at butt welds used in corner,tee or cruciforn~
joints, transversely from the point of intersection
4.4.2.1 HAZ soflening factor of the welded surfaces (see figures4.6(b), (c) and
The factor kLshould nornlally be taken from table 4.5. (dl);
For certain calculations it is pemussible instead to use (4) in any radial direction from the end of a weld
a more favourable valueas explained in appendixF. (see figures4.G(i) and o)).

Provided by IHS under license with BSI - Uncontrolled Copy O ßSI 07-1999 Licensee=Rolls Royce Enterprise Wide/5973912035, User=Wootton, John 41
1.0
kL
--``,``,,``,````````,``````,,,,`-`-`,,`,,`,`,,`---
0.5
Curve A outstands, unwdded.

Curve B outstands, welded.
(a) For flat outstand elements
Figure 4.6 Local buckling factor k~
The HAZ boundaries should generallybe taken as (a) in-line butt welds:
straight lines normalto the metal surface,as shown in
figure 4.6 However, it is permissible instead to asume
(1) 7 *** series alloys:
a curved boundaryof radius z as shown at B (in place (i) zo = 30 + tA/2
of A) in figure4.G(i). This wlitend to be advantageous (ii)zo = 4.5t*
when surface welding is applied to thick material. (2) other alloys:
4.4.3.2 Basic formulafor z (i) zo = 20 + tA/3
The following expression should generallybe used for (i )
20 = 3tA
estimating z:
z = (Yrlz, @) All other types of butt weld and all types of fillet
where weld
(1) 7 *** series alloys:
20 is the
basic
value
(see 4.4.3.3); (i) z, = 30 + t,&
(Y and v are rn-g factors, which may be (i) zo = 4.5tB2/tA
found from4.4.3.4 and 4.4.3.5, or
alternatively using appendixE (2) other alloys:
(i) zo = 20 + t A B
The use of appendix F wil tend to be favourable when (i)20 = 3tB2/tA
the interpass temperature during fabrication is held
below the normal value requiredin BS 8118 : Part 2. where
4.4.3.3 Determination of zo
tA is the lesser of 0.5(t~+ LC) and 1.5t~;
The basic valuezo, which would relate to an isolated
weld laid on unheated material with conlplete $, tC are the thickness of the thinnest and
interpass cooling, should be taken as the lower of the thickest elements connected by welding
two values given by (i) and (ii) (in mm) (depending on respectively.
the parent material) as follows:

42
Provided by IHS under license with BSI - Uncontrolled Copy Licensee=Rolls Royce Enterprise Wide/5973912035, User=Wootton, John O BSI 07-1999
1.0
kL
0.5
Curve C: internal elements, unwelded

Curve D: internal elements, welded
Curve E: round tubes
NOTE. See note 3 to table 4.3
@) For internal elements and round tubes
Figure 4.5 Local buckling factor k, (cmZuded)
4.4.3.4 Determination of a a valid

heat-path
being
which
for
one h 2 hl.
Thefactor CY in 4.4.3.2 providesfor the possibilityofwhere
the material at the start of deposition of a weld pass
being at an elevated temperature,due
either to h is the distance to a free edge, or half the
preheat, or to the layingof apreviouspass or weld in distance to a nearbyweld(seenote);
the sanle joint. Its value may be taken from table4.6,
which is valid provided fabrication complies with hl 4 . 5 for~ 7~ ***series alloys, or
BS 8118 : Part 2 (alternatively see appendix F). = 3 w o for other alloys.
4.4.3.5 Determination of 8 When a weld is located too close to the free edge
The factor 8 in 4.4.3.2 covers the possibility of of an outstand, suchthat h < hl, it should be
increased heat build-up dueto the following: assumed that the entire width of the outstand is
(a) proximity of a free edge or edges; or subject to the factor kZ.
NOTE. The distance h, should be measured from the point of
(b) other welding in the sanle vicinity. reference in the weld considered (see figure 4.6) and along
The value of 8 may be found as in (1) or (2) as the relevant heat-path through the metal at mid-thickness.
follows, provided fabrication satisfiesBS 8118 : Part 2. The heat-path follows the profile of the section and need not
necessarily be straight (sec figure 4.7).
Alternatively refer to appendix F.
(1) For a joint away from which there are at least (2) For a joint from whichthere is only one valid
two valid heat-paths: heat-path:
q=l tc 5 25 = 1.50
tc > 25 8 = 1.33
--``,``,,``,````````,``````,,,,`-`-`,,`,,`,`,,`---

O BSI 07-1999
43
lhble 4.5 HAZ softening factor IC,
ì
Alloy Condition kz
Non-heat treatable
1200 H14 O. 13
3103 H14 O. 18
H18 O. 13
3105 H14 O. 17
H16 O. 15
H18 O. 13
"
5083 o, F 1.00
H22 0.45
-_
5154A o, F 1.00
H22 0.40
H24 0.29
"
5251 F 0.20
F 1.00
H22 0.35
H24 0.24
5454 o, F 1.00
H22 0.35
H24 0.30
Heat-treatable
6061 T6 0.50
6063 T4 1.00
T4 O.65
T4 0.80
T5 O.75
T6 0.50
T6 0.45
6082 T4 1.00
T6 0.50
-
7020 T4 0.80(A) l.OO(B)
T6 O.GO(A) 0.80@)
I
(see note 2)
____~ I
NOTE 1. In the product column, E, S, P, DT,WT and F refer respectively to extrusion, she< plate, dr&n tube, welded tube and
forgings.
NOTE 2. For 7020 material refer to 4.4.2.2, for the applicability of the A and B values.
--``,``,,``,````````,``````,,,,`-`-`,,`,,`,`,,`---

44
(h)
--``,``,,``,````````,``````,,,,`-`-`,,`,,`,`,,`---
Figure 4.6 Extent of H A Z , definition of z
1 Table 4.6 Extent of H A Z , factor a

Case Joint configuration Value of a
i, S 25 mm
Substantially straight continuous weld figure (seefigures 4,6(a), (c),
(e)
P total deposit area d 50 nun2 1.0 1.5
Q total deDosit area > 50 nun2 1.5 2.0
~ ~~
R two or more
Substantially straight continuous joint containing 1.5 2.0
adjacent welds (see figures4.6 @), (d), (0 and (h))
S Localized irregular joint 1.5 2.0
(a) member-twnenlber jointsin trusses;
(b) welds connecting transverse stiffenersin beanls and
plate-girdvrs;
(c) welds used to connect lugs and other attachments.

Provided by IHS under license Owith BSI - Uncontrolled Copy BSI 07-1999 Licensee=Rolls Royce Enterprise Wide/5973912035, User=Wootton, John 45
4.5.1.4 Biaxid bending
Beanw subjectedto simultaneous bending about both
principal axes shouldalso be checked using 4.8.
--``,``,,``,````````,``````,,,,`-`-`,,`,,`,`,,`---
4.5.2 Uniaxial moment resistance of the section

4.5.2.1 Section class@cation for moment
resistance
Figure 4.7 Qpical heat-path
measurement It is f M necessary to classa the section as fully
compact, senucompact, or slender, the classifcation
I I being based on that of the least favourable of its
4.4.3.6 Overlapping HAZs component elements.This should be carried out in
accordance with 4.3.3.
When two joints are located so that their respective
HAZs (deternined as in 4.4.3) overlap, it may be In the case of a reinforced outstand elenlent,forn-
assunled that the extent of the HAZ on the outer side part or all of the compression flange,the presence of
of each jointis unaltered by the proximity. reinforcenlent inthe form of an outwardly facing lip
should be ignored inclassifying the section.
In calculating whetherW s overlap, the possibility of
elevated tenlperatures shouldbe taken into accountby 4.5.2.2 Basic calculation
using the formula for x from 4.4.3.2. The factored moment resistanceM m at a given
4.4.3.7 Experimental determination of z section, in the absence of shear should generally be
found as follows:
As an alternative to estimating the extent of the HAZ
by calculation, it is pernutted instead to determine it (a) unwelded, fully compact MB = poS,/ym;
experimentally. This may be done by conducting a
hardness survey ona representative specimen (see @) unwelded, semi-conpact M m = pOz,/ym;
appendix F). (c) welded, fully compact MRS = PoSndYm;
(d) welded, senu-compact MB = P J n d Y m ;
4.5 Beams (e) unwelded, slender MRS = Po&hn or
4.5.1 Introduction p,,Zn/ym whichever is
the snnller;
4.5.1.1 General (0 welded,
slender MB = P J & m or
The following checks should generally be carried out PJndYm whichever is
on all bean= (including plate girders). the smaller;
(a) Moment check. At any cross-section the
moment M under factored loading should not exceed where
the factored moment resistanceMB of that section,
as found from 4.5.2 (or alternatively appendixE). Snand Zn are the plastic moduli respectively of
MRS should be suitably reduced to allow for the net section;
coincident shear when necessasy (see4.5.4). Sne and Zn, are the plastic and elastic moduli
@) Shear check. At any cross-section the shear respectively for the net effective section;
force V under factored loading should not exceed the ze is the elastic
nlodulus of effective
factored shear force resistanceV= (see 4.5.3). section;
For some cases it is also necessary to make one or
both of the following checks: Po is the linuting stress (see
tables 4.1
and 4.2);
(1) web bearing check (see4.5.5);
Ym factor (see table 3.3).
is the nlaterial
(2) lateral torsional buckling check (see4.5.6).
NOTE. For semi-compact and slender sections it is permissible, if
4.5.1.2 Plate ginlers found favourable, to take a moment resistance based on an
Plate girders having slender stiffened webs should elasto-plastic stress pattern as set out in appendix E, instead of
preferably be designed using5.4. It is permissible to using the expressions in 4.5.2.2. When this is done, note 5
to 4.6.2.3 is invalid.
design then1as beams, but with probable lossof
economy.
4.5.1.3 Bending with axial load
For the design of beam required to carry load, in
addition to moment, reference should bemade to 4.8.

46
O BSI 07-1999
4.5.2.3 Assumed section (a) Each elenlentis classified according to its
The terminology used in4.5.2.2 is as follows: particular valueof pw
(a) net section includesthe deduction for holes only; (b) For a fully compact sectionMRS is found using
conventional plastic bending theory, allowing for the
(b) net effective section includesthe reduced
thickness taken in the vicinity of welds, to allow for value of po in each element, and again using the net
effective sectionin the case of welded members.
HAZ softening, together with deduction for holes;
(c) For other sectionsMRS is found from
(c) effective section includesthe reduced
expression (b), (d) or (e) in 4.5.2.2 as appropriate,
thicknesses takento allow for HAZ softening and basing p o and 2 on the point in the section giving
--``,``,,``,````````,``````,,,,`-`-`,,`,,`,`,,`---
local buckling,but with no deduction for holes. the lowest valuesof MRS.
In itenls (b) and (c) the reduced thicknesses should
generally be taken as follows for different elementsin 4.5.2.5 Semi-compact sections
a section (but see notes 1 to 5). For these it is permitted, if desired, to take an
(1) Slender elenlentfree of HAZ effects. A improved value ofM m which may be obtained by
thickness k ~ ist taken for the whole element, interpolation as follows:
where kL is found as in 4.3.4.
= h& +-
ßo-ß (Mf - M,)
(2) Non-slender elements subject to HAZ effects. A ßo -P1
thickness of kt is taken in the softened parts of where:
the element, where & and the extent of the
softening are as given in 4.4.2 and 4.4.3. Mf and M, are the fully compact
(3) Slender element withHAZ effects. The reduced and senu-compact valuesof
thickness is taken as the lesser of kt and k ~ int MRS found from4.5.2.2;
the softenedpart, and as kLt in the rest of the ß is the valueof ß for the mostcritical
element. element in the section;
NOTE 1. When a hole is located in a reduced thickness region, the 81 and ßo are the fully and senu-compact
deduction for that hole may be based on the reduced thickness. linuting values of ß for that Sanle
NOTE 2. In the case of reinforced elements kL should be applied table element (see table 4.3).
to the area of the reinforcement as well as to the basic plate
thickness. 4.5.3 Shear force resistance
NOTE 3. In considering a slender flange element that lies nearer
to the neutral axis than does the extreme fibre tensile material, it 4.5.3.1 Section classGfication
is permissible to take a more favourable value for k,,. This is done
by using a modified value of E in figure 4.5 (instead of the normal It is first necessary to classm the section as conlpact
value, see 4.3.4.2) as follows: or slender in terms of its resistance to shear force as
& = (25O~l/p&)”’ follows:
where y1 and are the distances from the elastic neutral axis of (a) a compact section is unaffected by buckhng;
the gross section to the extreme fibres and to the element (b) a slender section shouldbe checked for
considered, respectively. This relaxation only applies if the
element is substantially parallel to the axis of bending. buckling.
NOTE 4. For a reinforced element forming part or all of the The sections are classified as follows:
compression flange of a slender section, in which the (1) sections containing shear webs orientated in
reinforcement takes the form of an outwardly facing lip, the
presence of the lip should be ignored in determining the moment the plane of loadiig, without tongue-plates:
resistance. Ut I4 9 ~compact
NOTE 6 . For a welded element in a semicompact or slender Ut > 4 9 ~ slender
section a more favourable assumed thickness may be taken as
follows: where
(a) HAZ softening is ignored in any material less than k$l from
the elastic neutral axis of the gross section, where y1 is the d is the clear
depth of web
between
distance therefrom to the furthest extreme fibres of the section. flanges (measured on the slope in the
@) For HAZ material, at a distance y ( > k g y ,from
) the neutral case of inclined webs);
axis, kZ may be replaced by a value kzy determined as follows:
t is the web
thickness;
kzy = k, + 1 - u/ul
E = (250/p0)“ m (150/”,)”;
4.5.2.4 Hubrid sections
po and pv are the linuting stress (in N/nun2)
The moment capacityof a hybrid section, containing (see tables4.1 and 4.2);
parent materials of different strengths,may be safely
based on the lowest value of po within the section. (2) sections as in (l), but with tongue-plates:
Alternatively, the following more advantageous see 4.5.3.5;
procedure may be used. (3) solid bar compact;
(4) round tube: same classlfication as for axial
compression (see 4.3.2.5 and 4.3.3.4(b)).

O BSI 07-1999 Licensee=Rolls Royce Enterprise Wide/5973912035, User=Wootton, John
47
~
STD-BSI BS 8118: PART 1-ENGL 1991 D lb211bb9 0791155b 795 D

4.5.3.2 Compact sections (a) Yielding check. The resistance is calculated as

The factored shear force resistance VRS at a section, in for a conlpact section,using 4.5.3.2 (a) or @) as
appropriate.
the absence of moment, may be found using the
following equation: (b) Buckling check. VRS, in kN, is obtained from the
following expression:
I
v, = P d v ~ Y n l v, = 340Nt3/dym
where
where
p , is the limiting stress (see tables4.1 and 4.2);
A, is the effective shear area; d is the clear depth of web between flanges (nun); I
Ym is the material factor (see table3.3). t is the web thickness (nun);
I The effective shear area is as follows. N is the number of webs;
ym is the material factor (see table 3.3).
(a) For sections containingshear webs without
tongue- plates, that are free from HAZ softening,A, 4.5.3.4 Inclined shear webs
is determined fromthe following equation: The expressions covering compact sections
Av = 0.8 NDt in 4.5.3.2 (a) and (b) renlain valid for inclined webs,
provided D is still measured normalto the neutral axis.
where: But in checking slender inclined webs (see4.5.3.3) the
D is the overall depth of web measured to outer expression in (b) should be factored by cos 8, where 8
surface of flanges; is the angle between the web and the plane of the
applied l o w .
--``,``,,``,````````,``````,,,,`-`-`,,`,,`,`,,`---
t is the web thickness;
4.5.3.5 Use of tongue-plates
N is the number of webs.
The shear force resistanceof sections containing shear
The presence of small holes may be ignored, webs with tongue-plates may safely be found generally
provided in total they do not occupy more than 20 % using the treatment given in 5.4.3.1 to 5.4.3.5, but with
of the clear web depth, between flanges. the v-factors takenas follows:
(b) For sectionsas in (a), but with webs affectedby
HAZ softening A, is deternined from the following v1 is the elasticcritical shear buckling factor
equation: and is determined as given in 5.4.3.3;
A, = N(0.8Dt - ‘(1- &)&t) qf is the tensionfieldfactorand is equal to
zero.
where
This treatment is valid only if the tongue-plates comply
d, is the total depth of HAZ material occurring with 5.4.5.
within the clear depth of the web between 4.5.4 Combined moment and shear force
flanges (see 4.4.3);
4.5.4.1 Moment with low shear
Ir, is the softening factor (see 4.4.2). At any section it may be assunled that the factored
For a web welded over its full depth, or moment resistanceMRS is unaffected by a coincident
shear force V (under factored loading) lessthan half
continuously welded longitudinallyat any point in its the factored shear force resistance V, found
depth, V, should be taken as Ir, tinles the unwelded in 4.5.3.3.
value.
4.5.4.2 Moment with high shear
(c) For a solid bar,A, = 0.8A or O.Me. If V exceeds 0.5 V,, a reduced value forthe factored
(d) For a compact round tube,A, = 0.64 or 0.64, monlent resistance MRSO should be found as follows:
where (a) For sections with shear webs, connected to
flanges at both longitudinal edges:
A is the section area ( i the absence of HAZ
softening); MRN = k
?,(I+(1 - U)(O.6 - 1.2 VNRS)]
(b) For other sections:
4 is the effective section area (when HAZ MRN = MRS(1.6 - 1.2vfl,)
softening is present), foundby taking an
effective thicknessof Ir, times the true where
thickness forHAZ nlaterial. M, is the factoredmomentresistance of the
In the case of sections containing shear webs, the section in the absence of shear
methods providedfor the calculation of V, for plate (see 4.5.2);
@ers may be used (see 5.4.3.2 and 5.4.3.5). ci is the ratio ofminimunl to nmximunl
4.5.3.3 Slender sections shear stress in the web, assuning an
The factored shear force resistance V, in the absence e W c stress distribution.
of moment for sections containing slendershear webs For sections classifiedas slender for bending,or
without tongue-plates, orientatedin the plane of affected by HAZ softening, (Y should be based on the
loading, should be taken as the lesser of the two assumed section used in the determination of MRS
values obtained from(a) and (b) as follows: (see 4.5.2.3).

48
Provided by IHS under license with BSI - Uncontrolled Copy Licensee=Rolls Royce Enterprise Wide/5973912035, User=Wootton, John Q BSI 07-1999
4.5.5 Web bearing 4.5.6 Lateral torsional buckling
4.5.5.1 General 4.5.6.1 General
This c l a w concerns the design of webs subjected to A beam, other than those allowed exemption
localized forces causedby concentrated loadsor in 4.5.6.2, should be checked against possible failure
reactions appliedto a beam. by lateral torsional bucklingin accordance with4.5.6.3
to 4.5.6.8.
4.5.5.2 Unstwened web
When the web itself is required to carry the localized 4.5.6.2 Exemptions
force, without the provisionof a bearing stiffener,as The possibility of premature failureby lateral torsional
for example undera rolling load, both the following buckling may be ignored in any of the following cases:
should be met: (a) bending aboutthe minor axis;
(a) Pwl SPalY, or k&a/Yrn; (b) beam supported against lateral movement
throughout its length;
0P W ~ ~ P J Y ~ ;
(c) lateral supportsto compression flange provided
where at spacing not greaterthan 4Ocry,
Pwl and Pw2 are stresses arising at its extreme where
edge and mid-point respectively,
assuming a 45 O dispersion angle
either sideof a localized force;
Y
r is the minor axis radius of
the section:
gyration
of I
is the linuting stres (see tables 4.1 E = (250/p0)N;
Pa
and 4.2); Po is the linuting stress ( i N/nuu2) of
PS is the buckliig stress for the web compression flange material(see
treated as a thin colunm between tables 4.1 and 4.2).
the flanges;
4.5.6.3 Basic condition
is the softening factor forHAZ
material (see Appendix F, table F1 The beam should be checked for possible lateral
and 4.4.2); torsional bucklig in every unsupported bay between
points of lateral support.In each of these the following
Ym is the material factor (see table3.3). condition shouldbe satisfied
In (a) the second expression should be used whenthe M 5 MRx
web is welded to the flange andHAZ softening occurs. where
--``,``,,``,````````,``````,,,,`-`-`,,`,,`,`,,`---
Otherwise the first expression is valid.
M is the moment arising under factored
p, should be determined as given in 4.7.4.1 selecting loa- in the length considered;
the curve in figure 4.10(a) that intercepts the stress-&
at a value po (see tables4.1 and 4.2). The slenderness MRX is the factored momentof resistance to
parameter A to be used to select the curve should lateral torsionalbucklig, and is equal to
allow for possible relative lateral movement of the PsS/y,;
flanges as the web buckles. Assuminga web fixity S is the plastic section modulus of gross
intemediate between full fUrty and sinlple support,the section, without reduction forHAZ
value of A is given by 2 . W t . softening, local bucklingor holes;
4.5.5.3 Web with tongue-plate Ym is the material factor (see table3.3);
When a tongueplate is provided, 4.5.5.2(a) should be PS is the buckling stress (see 4.5.6.5).
satisfied both at the top edge of the tongueplate, and
at the upper edgeof the thin web. 4.5.6.4 Allowance for moment variation
4.5.5.4 Stwened web The value ofM in 4.5.6.3 may be safely takenas the
A bearing stiffener,if fitted, should beof compact maximum value arising inthe bay considered.
section. It may be conservatively designed on the Alternatively, it ispernutted totake M as the equivalent
assumption that it resists the entire bearing force, unifom.1 moment M. For the case of simple moment_
unaided by the web, the stiffener being checkedas a gradient in the length considered (linear variation)M
strut (see 4.7) for out-of-plane column bucklig and may be taken as follows:
local squashing, with bending effects allowed for if (a) for 1.0 > MdMl 2 -0.5 2 = O.Wl + 0.m~;
necessary (see 4.8). Alternatively, a more econonucal @) for M2/M1 < -0.5 2 = 0.Ml;
stiffener may be designed by referringto the plate
grder stiffener clause (see5.4.5). where M1 and M2 are respectively the n~aximun.1 and
minimum moments arising (see figure4.8). For other
cases of moment variation refer to appendix H.

~ ~~ ~~
~~
STD-BSI BS 8118: PART L-ENGL 1991 W Lb2Vbb9 079V558 5b8 D

For the following cases, however, appendixH should

be used to find the effective length of the bean1 (1):
(1) cantilever b e a m s ;
(2) bean- subject to destabilizing loads,
i.e. loading between points of lateral support, that
effectively acts at a point in the section on the
compression side ofthe neutral axis;
(3) beams subjectto normal loads whenthe
compression flangeis laterally unrestrained, both
flanges are free to rotate in plan, and torsional
restraint is provided only by the bearing of the
bottom flange on the supports.
Figure 4.8 Lateral torsional buckling, For all other types of support 1 may be safely taken
equivalent uniform momentEi as the distance between pointsof lateral support.
Alternatively a more favourable value for certain
restraint conditions may be found using H.l.
4.5.6.5 Buckling stress @) General expression:L = 1r(Es/2M,~)”
The lateral torsional bucklingstressp, should be read where
from figure4.9 using the curve which interceptsthe
stress axis at a stress pl found as follows: E is the modulus of elasticity;
(a) For unwelded fully compact section S is the plastic section modulus of gross section;
--``,``,,``,````````,``````,,,,`-`-`,,`,,`,`,,`---
P l =Po; Mc, is the elastic critical uniforn~moment

@) For other sections, including hybrid (see H.2).
PI = Y n f l R d S
where (c) Channel and I-section members coveredby
table 4.7 : parameter A may be taken as follows, but
po is the limiting stress (seetables 4.1 and 4.2); should not exceedthe value given by (a):
MRS is the factoredmonlent resismce of the
section;
S is the plasticsectionmodulus of gross XI,,
section;
ym is the materialfactor (seetable 3.3).
where:
M m should be found generally in accordance
with 4.5.2, allowing for local buckling and HAZ D is the overall
section
deptly
softening, but with no deductionfor holes. tZ is the flange
thickness;
NOTE. For beams of high slenderness ( A > 130) it will be
necessary to refer to the appropriate nondimensional curve in X and Y are the coeffkients to be found
appendix K to find P,. using table 4.7 or they may be
conservatively takenas X = 1.0,
4.5.6.6 Slenderness parameter Y = 0.05.
The lateral torsional buckling slenderness parameter I,
needed for figure 4.9, may be obtained using any of the NOTE. When the flange reinforcement to an I-beam or channel
following expressions(a) to (c). member is not of the precise form shown in table 4.7 (simple lips),
it is still permissible to obtain I using the expression in (c) above.
(a) Conservative value:A = I , = Ur, In so doing, X and Y should be taken as for an equivalent simple
where lip having the same internal depth C, while A, is calculated for the
section with its actual reinforcement.
1 is the effective length for lateral torsional 4.5.6.7 Wective lateral restraints
buckling; Bracing systems providing lateral restmint shouldbe
r, is the minor axis I‘ddius of w o n for gross designed on the assumption that the total lateralforce
section. exerted by a compression flange, under factored
loading, shared between the points of restraint in any
one span,is 3 % of the compression inthat flange.

50
O B S I 07-1999
~ ~~~ ~
~~
STD.BSI BS 8118: PART L-ENGL L99L D 1b24bb9 0794559 4 T 4 D

Section 4 BS 8118 : Part 1 : 1991
300
200
E
E
z
P"
100
O 50 100
A
NOTE. To find ps at A > 130 refer to figure K1.
Figure 4.9 Lateral torsional buckling of beams, buckling stress P,
Where a series of two or more parallel bean- require However, when HAZ softening occurs at the ends of
lateral restraint, itis not adequate merely to tie the the bay only,its presence may be ignored in
compression flanges togetherso that they become considering lateral torsionalbucklig, provided that
mutually dependent. Adequate restraintwill be such softening does not extenda distance along the
provided only by anchoringthe ties to an independent member, at each end of the bay, greater than the width
robust support, or by providing a triangulated bracing of the section.
system. If the number of parallel beams exceed three,
it is sufficient for the restmint system to be designed
to resist the sum of the lateral forces derived fromthe 4.6 Tension members
three largest compressive forces only. 4.6.1 General
4.5.6.8 Beams containing localized welds "he tension P arising under factoredloadiig of axially
The value of MRS in 4.5.6.5 for a beam, subjectto HAZ loaded tension membem (ties) should not exceed the
softening, should generally referto the most factored tension resistancePR^ of the section
unfavourable section in the bay considered, even when (see 4.6.2).
such softening occurs only locally alongthe length. For tension members having eccentric end connections
it is generally necessary to refer to 4.8 to allow for
interaction between axial load andthe moments
introduced. However, in certain cases (see 4.6.3) it is
permissible to use a simplified procedure.
--``,``,,``,````````,``````,,,,`-`-`,,`,,`,`,,`---

O BSI 07-1999
51
~
I a b l e 4.7 Lateral torsional buckling of beams, coefficients X and Y
I
I Beam section 1Coefficients

D t2
X = 0.90 - 0.03 - + 0.04 -
B tl
Y = 0.05 - 0.010
{%--- 1
)}%
1, = t2 0.03 - 0.07-
B "1 -
C
0.3 -
B
C
Y = 0.05 - 0.06 -
D
o
r-
D t2
X = 0.95 - 0.03-
B
+ 0.06 -
11
Y = 0.07 - 0.014 { %$ - 1)}
C
- 0.06- - 0.3 -
B
? B
C
Y = 0.07 - 0.10 -
D
NOTE 1. The expmions for X and Yare valid.for 1.5 5 D l 3 5 4.5, 5 0.5
NOTE 2. For the specific shape of lipped channel standardized in BS 1161 : X = 0.95, Y = 0.071.
--``,``,,``,````````,``````,,,,`-`-`,,`,,`,`,,`---
~~

52
4.6.2 Tension resistance 4.6.2.4 Staggered holes
4.6.2.1 General Where staggered holes occur, alternative values forA,
or An, should be calculatedas in (a) and (b) as
--``,``,,``,````````,``````,,,,`-`-`,,`,,`,`,,`---
The factored tension resistancePS should be takenas
follows, and the lower value then usedin 4.6.2.3.
the lesser of two values Corresponding respectively to:
(a) An or A,, is taken at the least favourable
(a) general yielding alongthe member (see 4.6.2.2);
cross-section.
(b) local failure at a critical section (see4.6.2.3).
@) A dlagonal or zig-% section is considered, with
4.6.2.2 General yielding An or A,, found as follows.
The value PB is based on the generalcrosssection of A, = A - H or A,, =A, - H
the member along its length, ignoringthe effect of end where
connections, occasional holesor localized HAZ regions
as follows. H = XAh - X$%&/
(a) For a member free fromHAZ softening, or only
thus affected at localized positions along its length: x and y are the longitudinalandtransverse
pitch of holes respectively;
PRS = P&Ym
(b) For a member in whichthe section contains
t is the plate
thickness or effective
HAZ material generally along the length, as with plate thickness;
longitudinal welds. CA is the sun1 of hole areas on the
diagonal or zig-zag section
&S = P 4 J Y r n
considered.
where
P , is the linuting stress (see tables4.1 and 4.2); 4.6.2.5 Hubrid sections
A is the goss section area; The tension capacity of a hybrid section, containing
A, is the effective section area; material of different strengths should be foundby
ym is the nmterial factor (see table3.3).
adding togetherthe resistances of the various parts,
obtained in 4.6.2.3.
A, is found by taking a reduced area equal to k,
tinles the true area for a softened zone,k, being 4.6.3 Eccentrically connected ties
taken as in 4.4.2, and the extent of the zone as Eccentrically connected ties include the following:
in 4.4.3. (a) angles connected through one leg;
4.6.2.3 Local failure (b) web-connected channels;
The value of PRS is based on the most critical section (c) flange connected tees.
as follows: Singlebay tension membersof these three types may
(a) For a section free fromHAZ softening: be designed as axially loaded and the variation in
PRS= P & n h stress in the outstanding leg or legs ignored, provided
that, in deternmng the area An or A,, needed for the
(b) For a section containing HAZ material:
local check (see4.6.2.3), part of the outstanding leg
PRS= PdndYn, area is deducted from the gross area, as well as any
where deduction for holesor HAZ effects. The amount of
outstanding leg to be deducted is as follows:
pa is the linuting stress (see tables 4.1 and 4.2); (1) single
componentconnectedoneside 0.U"
An is the net section area, with deduction for of a gusset
holes; (2) double
conlponent
synuuetrically 0.2.4,
An, is the net effective section area; connected either sideof gusset
ym is the nlaterial factor (see table 3.3). where A, is the effective area of the outstanding leg or
legs lying clear of the connected element,but ignoring
The value of An, is found in the sanleway as A, any fillet.
(see 4.6.2.2), but with suitable deduction for holesif
necessary. The deductionfor holes in HAZ regions may When such members are continuous over several bays,
be based on the reduced thickness&t. it is only necessary to apply the above treatment at the
outer ends of the end bays. Elsewhere the local
tension resistance may be found as in 4.6.2.3, without
any outstanding leg deduction.
The general yielding check shouldbe performed as
given in 4.6.2.2.

Provided by IHS under license O BSI 07-1999
with BSI - Uncontrolled Copy
53
~~~ ~ ~~ ~ ~~ ~ ~
STD-BSI BS 8118: PART 1-ENGL L991 D l b 2 4 b b 9 07945b2 T99 m

4.7 Compression members 4.7.4 Column buckling

4.7.1 General 4.7.4.1 Buckling stress
4.7.1.1 Three checks are generally needed for axially The value of ps for colunm buckling shouldbe read
loaded conlpression members(struts) as follows: from the appropriate curvein figure 4.10, selected in
accordance with4.7.6.
(a) column, i.e. f l e d , buckling check (see 4.7.3
and 4.7.4) (refers to overall buckling of the member 4.7.4.2 Slenderness parameter
--``,``,,``,````````,``````,,,,`-`-`,,`,,`,`,,`---
as a whole); The colunm buckling slenderness parameterA needed

(b) torsional buckling check (see4.7.3 and 4.7.5) for figure 4.10 is defined as follows:
(refers to overall buckling of the member as a A = Ur
whole); where
(c) local squashmg check(see 4.7.7) (relates to the I is the effective length;
weakest cross-section downits length).
r is the d u s of gyration;
Check (a) should always be made. Check(b) is
generally required, but nlay be waived in some cases. both appropriateto the direction of buckling
Check (c) is only needed for struts having low considered.
slenderness ratiosthat are sigruficantly weakened The effective length1 should be taken as KL, where L
locally by holes or welding. is the length between pointsof lateral support; or for a
cantilever strut, its length. The valueof K,the effective
4.7.1.2 To take account of interaction between axial length factorfor struts should be assessed froma
load and bending itis generally necessary to refer knowledge of the end conditions; table4.8 gives
to 4.8. However, for struts having eccentric guidance.
endconnections it is in certain cases permissibleto
use a simplified procedure (see4.7.9) to allow for the The value ofr should be based on the gross section for
moments introduced. all members.
NOTE. When the cross-section is wholly or substantially affected
4.7.2 Section classification for axial by HAZ softening at a directionally restrained end ofa member,
compression such restraint should be ignored in arriving at a suitable value
for K. Thus for case 1 in table 4.8 K should be taken as 1.0 if the
Before nuking any of the three checks given in 4.7.1 it section is fully softened at each end.
is first necessary to class@ the cross-section as
compact or slender. The classication is based on that mble 4.8 Effective length factorK for struts
of the least favourableof its component elements,in End conditions K
accordance with4.3.3.
1 Effectively held in position and 0.7
4.7.3 Resistance to overall buckling restrained in direction at both ends
With both checks (a) and @) the axial thrust P under
factored loading should not exceedthe factored axial 2 Effectively held in position at both 0.85
resistance PR based on overall buckling, given by the ends and restrained in direction at one
following: end
h =PSAlYm 3 Effectively held in positionat both 1.0
ends, but not restrained in direction
where
4 Effectively held in positionat one 1.25
A is the gross area,withoutreduction for HAZ end, and restrained in directionat both
softening, local bucklingor holes; ends
PS is the buckling stress inflexural or torsional 5 Effectively held in position and 1.5
buckling; restrained in direction at one end, and
ym is the material factor (see table 3.3). partially restrained in direction but not
held in position at the other end
In finding p, for column buckling, failure about both 6 Effectively held in position and 2.0
principal axes should be considered and the lower restrained in directionat one end, but
value taken. not held in positionor restrained at the
NOTE. For a strut of high slenderness (1 z 130) it will be other end
necessary to refer to appendix K to find P,.

54
O E S 1 07-1999
I STDaBSI BS 8118: PART L-ENGL 1991 W LbZqbb9 079q5b3 9 2 5 m
i Section 4 BS 8118 :Part 1 : 1991
300
--``,``,,``,````````,``````,,,,`-`-`,,`,,`,`,,`---
200
N
E
E
z
am
100
O 50 100
A
(a>
NOTE. To find p , at d > 130 refer to figure K.l.
Figure 4.10 Column buckling stress P, for struts

O BSI 07-1999
55
300
@>
NOTE. To find p , at 1 > 130 refer to figure K.l.
Figure 4.10 Column buckling stress P, for struts (continued)
--``,``,,``,````````,``````,,,,`-`-`,,`,,`,`,,`---

56
O
BSI 07-1999
300
200
N
E
E
\
æ
Q.*
100
--``,``,,``,````````,``````,,,,`-`-`,,`,,`,`,,`---
Figure 4.10 Column buckling stress P, for struts (conclwled)

O RSI 07-1999 Not for Resale, 07/16/2013 06:15:20 MDT
4.7.5 Torsional buckling 4.7.6.2 Determination of p l
4.7.5.1 Exemptions The value ofpl should g e n e d y be found as follows
(but refer to 4.7.6.4 for sections composed of radiating
The possibility of torsional bucklingmay be ignored outstands):
for the following:
(a) closed hollow sections; (a) compactsection,with no HAZ pl = P ,
(b) doubly symmetrical I-sections; effects
(c) sections composed entirelyof radiamg (b) other sections,
generally Pl = (AeWPo
outstands, e.g. angles,tees, cruciform, that are where
classified as compact in accordance with4.3.3.
4.7.5.2 Slenderness parameter A is the gross area of section;
The torsional buckling slenderness parameter1 may be A, is the area of effective section
obtained using either (a) or (b) below, or else by (see 4.7.6.3);
referring to appendix J. It should alwaysbe based on p, is the limiting stress for the
the gross area of the section as follows. material (see tables 4.1
(a) General formula I = n(EAPCr)” and 4.2).
where
Curve selection on this basis is valid, providedthe
A is the gross section area, withoutreduction member meetsthe tolerances of straightness and twist
for local buckling, HAZ softening or holes; laid down for extruded material (seeBS 8118 : Part 2).
When there is a possibility that a fabricated strut will
E is the modulus of elasticity; fail to meet these tolerances,p l should be takenas
PCr is the elastic critical load for torsional S times the value given by4.7.6.2 (a) or (b) above,
buckling, allowing for interaction with where
column buckling when necessary. S = 0.6 + O.Eiexp(- 0.021) (but not exceeding 1.0).
(b) Sections as given in table 4.9 4.7.6.3 w e c t i v e section

1 = k1t Effective section appliesto strut sections that are as
where follows:
(a) classified as slender;
k is readfromfigure 4.11. (b) affected by HAZ softenkg
At is found as fOllOWS: (c) both (a) and (b).
--``,``,,``,````````,``````,,,,`-`-`,,`,,`,`,,`---
(1) for angles, tees, cruciforms It = 1, The effective sectionmay be obtained by talung
(2) for channels, t o p ” reduced thicknesses, withno deduction for holes as
follows, andmay be based on the least favourable
1 - 10 cross section (but see 4.7.6.5 for welded members).
- [ 1 + (YA,W,”))
(1) Slender section,free from HAZ softening. The
W l e 4.9 contains expressions for1, and y and thickness of any element is taken as kL tinles its
also for S and X (needed for figure 4.11). true thickness t, where kL is found as in 4.3.4. In
the case of reinforced elementskL should be
In (2) the quantity Ax should be taken as the applied to the area of the reinforcement as well as
effective slendernessfor column buckling about to the basic thicknessof the plate.
axis xx (asdefined in table 4.9).
(2) Compact section, withHAZ softening. The
4.7.5.3 Buckling stress thickness of any softened zone shouldbe reduced
The value of p , for torsional buckling should be read so as to give it an assumedarea equal to k, times
from the appropriate curvein figure 4.12, selected in its true area. The extent of such a zone should be
accordance with4.7.6. found from4.4.3, and the value of & from 4.4.2.
4.7.6 Strut curve selection (3) Slender section, withHAZ softening. For
slender elementsfree from HAZ effects the
4.7.6.1 Basic procedure reduced thicknessis found as in (1); and for HAZ
The overall bucklingStressp, should be read from the regions not located in slender elementsit is taken
appropriate strut curve diagram in figure 4.10 (for as in (2). If an element is both slender and
column buckling)or fgwe 4.12 (for torsional affected byHAZ softening, the reduced thickness
buckling). Choice of diagm should be in accordance is taken as the lesser of kLt and &t in the softened
with table 4.10. In any given diagram the appropriate part and as k ~ elsewhere
t in it.
c w e is that meeting the stress axis at a stress p l , to Sections composedof radiating outstands are treated
be determined as in 4.7.6.2. specially (see4.7.6.4).

58
O BSI 07-1999
Table 4.9 Torsional buckling parameters for struts
1
i= I&,
Y = 0.6
2 lo = 11 - ( ~ - 1 ) ( 2 ( ~ - 1-)1.5~)
~
5 = I&,
Y = 0.6
--``,``,,``,````````,``````,,,,`-`-`,,`,,`,`,,`---
3 (:see note1 l o = 66
S= Iu/Io
Equal
X = 0.61
U
4 p 5 5 A, = (D/t)(4.2 + 0.8 - O . G P ~ .(Oh)"

~
0.5 IBAI I1.0 S = ~4 = (1 + 6(1 - BAI)2)(Iu/10)

X =X, = 0.6 - 0.4(1 -
5 p55 I, = A4 + 1.5p(url) - 2 ( ~ - 1 ) ~
0.5 IBA9 I1.0 S = S4
1 IW I2.5 x = x4
6 [see note 1) I , = 57
S = 1.4(Iu110)
x = 0.60
7 p I3.5 I, = 5.Wt - (Bk)%

x =1

O
No reproduction or networking permitted without license from IHS BSI 07-1999 Not for Resale, 07/16/2013 06:15:20 MDT 59
--``,``,,``,````````,``````,,,,`-`-`,,`,,`,`,,`---
a b l e 4.9 Torsional buckling parameters for struts (continued)

8 Y
9 ,Y P55
0.5 5 D B 5 2.0
15 W 5 2.5
10 (see note 1) Ao = 70
,Y
S = Ay/Ao
x = 0.83
‘Y
11 [see note 1) 1, = GO
,Y
5 = AylAo
Y = 0.76
Y
12 [see note 1) I, = 63
IY
i= “/Ao
Y = 0.89
13 1.5 S D B 5 2.0 1, = (D/t( 1.4 + 1.5(BD) +
3 I3.5 + l.l(D/!) - (D/t)”

: = )Ly/Ao
= 1.3- 0.8DB + 0.2(DB)2

60
~
~~
S T D - B S IB S B 1 L B : PART L-ENGL 1991, m Lb24bbS D7795b7 3 4 3

Section 4 ' BS 8118 :Part 1 : 1991
I Table 4.9 Torsional buckling parameters for struts (continued)

see note 1) Lo = 65
T
~ = Iy/Io
I:= 0.78
lO=(B/t2)(7+ 1.5(D/B)(t2/tl))
;= &/It
Y = 0.38 DI3 - 0.04

Y = 0.14 - O. W / B - 0.02tzItl
1 5 D/B 5 3 I, = (B/t)(7 + 1.5D/B + 5C/B)

C/B 5 0.4 5 = &/It
Unifoml thickness Y = 0.38D/B - 0.04(D/B)2 - 0.25C/B

Y = 0.12 - O.O2D/B + (O.G(C/B)'/(D/B - 0.5))
1 zs D/B 5 3 Lo = (B/t)(7 + 1.5D/B + 5CB)

C/B 5 0.4 S= Ax/&
Unifoml thiclaess X = 0.38D/B - 0.04(D/B)"
Y = 0.12 - 0.20B - (O.O5(C//BY(DB- 0.5)}
[see note 1) I, = 126
S = &/At
X = 0.59
Y = 0.104
--``,``,,``,````````,``````,,,,`-`-`,,`,,`,`,,`---

Q RSI 07-1999
61
lhble 4.9 Torsional buckling parameters for struts (concluded)
NOTE 1. Shapes of reinforced section complying with BS llGl
NOTE 2. The sections are generally of uniform thickness t , except cases 14 and 15.
NOTE 3. i,,,,L,, L, is the slenderness parameter (//Y) for flexural buckling about the u, x or y axis.
NOTE 4. p is a factor depending on the amount of fillet material at the root of the section as follows:
Radiused fillets p = R4
45’ fillets p = 1.6F/’t
“c
r
--``,``,,``,````````,``````,,,,`-`-`,,`,,`,`,,`---
NOTE 5. The values given for L,, X and Yare only valid within the linlits shown. In the case of back-to-back angles (cases 8 to 12) the
expressions cease to apply if the gap between the angles exceeds 2t.
’hble 4.10 Choice of strut curve diagram

Q p e of buckling Unwelded strut Welded strut
Column buckling:
synmetric or nddly asymmetric section Figure 4.10@) Figure 4.10(a)
section
asymmetric
severely I
Figure 4.10(b) Figure 4.10(c)
Torsional buckling:
generally Figure 4.12(a)
section
composed of radiating
outstands (see 4.7.6.4) Figure
4.12@) I
NOTE 1. A strut should generally be regarded as welded, for the purpose of this table, if it contains welds on a length greater than the
‘argest dimension of the section. This is regardless of whether or not there are HAZ effects.
VOTE 2. A mildly asymmetric section is one for which y1/y2 I1.5 where .y1 and g2 are the distances from the buckling axis to the
Further and nearer extreme fibres, respectively. Otherwise, the section should be treated as severely asymmetric.
4.7.6.4 Sections composed of radiating outstands @) Section containing outstands with tip
For sections suchas angles, tees and cruciforms, reinforcement. If the reinforced outstands are such
composed entirely of radiating outstands, local and that mode 1 would be critical in terms of local
torsional bucklingare closely related. For suchstruts buckling (see4.3.2.3), the same procedureis
the procedure should beas follows: followed as in (a). But if mode 2 is critical,
figure 4.12 (a) should be employedand the effective
(a) Section containing only unreinforced outstands. section foundas in 4.7.6.3.
(1) In considering torsional buckling figure 4.12 (b)
may be used for findingps, instead of 4.7.6.5 Struts containing localized welds
figure 4.12 (a). (The relevant diagram for column Strut curve selectionfor a member affected byHAZ
buckling is unaltered). softening should generally be based on a value of p l
(2) In determining p l , needed for selecting the obtained for the most unfavourable section, even when
appropriate curve in figures 4.10 and 4.12 such softening occurs only locally along the length.
(see 4.7.6.2), the area A, should be based onan This includes HAZ effects due to the welding on of
effective sectionin which the nomml reduction is tempomy attachments.
made for zones affected byHAZ softening, but However, when such HAZ softening has a certain
with no reduction for local buckhng, specified location along the length,its presence may be
i.e. take ICL = 1. Thus for such a section free of ignored in considering overall buckling, providedthe
HAZ effects: p l = po. softening does not extend longitudinallya distance
greater than the least overall widthof the member, The
location of the HAZ softening, forthis relaxation to be
allowed, is the position of zero or near-zero curvature
in the buckled form of the strut.
62
O B S I 07-1999
--``,``,,``,````````,``````,,,,`-`-`,,`,,`,`,,`---

O BSI 07-1999
300
200
N
E
E
z
P"
100
--``,``,,``,````````,``````,,,,`-`-`,,`,,`,`,,`---
(al
NOTE. To find p , at L > 130 refer to figure K.l
Figure 4.12 Torsional buckling stress P, for struts
Thus for a strut held in position at its ends (see where

table 4.8, case 3) it may be assumed that the overall pa is the liiting stress (see tables 4.1 and 4.2);
buckling resistanceis unaffected by the presence of
localized softened zones,if these are located at the An is the net section area, with deduction for
ends. (In such a case it will be importantto nmke the unfilled holes;
local squashing check). An, is the net effective section area;
4.7.7 Local squashing ym is the nuterial factor (see table 3.3).
The axial thrustP under factored loading should not
exceed the factored resistance Pm of the most The area A,, should be taken as A, less deductionfor
unfavourable section alongthe length of a strut, unfilled holes, whereA, is the effective area used in
detemked as follows: the considemtion of overall buckling (colunm or
torsional), see 4.7.6.3 and 4.7.6.4. For holes locatedin
(a) compact section, free from HAZ . pRs =pdn/ym; reduced thickness regions the deduction nlay be based
effects on the reduced thickness, insteadof the full thickness.
@) other sections, generally PRS= PaPnJYnl;

64
Provided by IHS under license with BSI - Uncontrolled Copy Licensee=Rolls Royce Enterprise Wide/5973912035, User=Wootton, John O BSI 07-1!999
~
STD-BSI BS 6118: PART 1-ENGL 3773 W 1 b 2 4 b b 7 0774573 674 W

300
200
N
--
E
E
z
P”
100
@>
Figure 4.12 Torsional bucklingstress P, for struts (concluded)
4.7.8 Hybrid sections of the connected element, andif no deliberate bending

In struts containing parent materialsof different is applied
strengths each element should be classified according (a) single angle connected through one legonly;
to its particular value of P,. @) back-teback angles connected oneside of a
I The resistance PR to overall colunm or torsional
buckling nlay be found assunkg a uniform value of P,,
gusset;
(c) single channel connected by its web only;
equal to the weighted averageof the P, values for the
various parts (weighted accordingto the gross areas single tee connected by its table only.
thereof). For these itis pernussible, in makingthe check for
The resistance PRSto local squashingmay be found by colunm buckling out of the plane of the attached
sunming the resistance of the various parts. element or elements, to ignore the eccentricity of
loading, and instead take a reduced axial conlpression
4.7.9 Certain cases of eccentrically connected resistance equalto 40 % of the value that would be
struts obtained for centroidal loading usingthe radius of
gyration about the axis parallel to the gusset. The
4.7.9.1 Single-bay struts
torsional buckling resistance is assunled unaffected by
The following typesof eccentrically connectedstrut the eccentricity.
may be treated using a simple method, insteadof the
interaction procedure given in 4.8, provided the
attachment is sufficient to prevent rotation in the plane
--``,``,,``,````````,``````,,,,`-`-`,,`,,`,`,,`---

O BSI 07-1999
G5
4.7.9.2 Struts of two components back-to-back a is thespacing of main components
Such struts of double angle, channelor tee measured to the centroids of the
construction, connected either sideof end-gussets, may connections to each batten;
be designed as nlonolithic centroidally loaded N is the number of battens at each position
members providedthat the following occur (1 or 2).
(a) the two components are securely connected
together at their ends; and In designing the battens it is important to consider the
possible weakening effects of local buckling and HAZ
(b) they are connected alsoat the third points, using
softening (if welded).
spacers equal to the gusset thickness.
4.7.10 Battened struts
4.8 Bending with axial force and biaxial
4.7.10.1 The general rules for struts given in 4.7.3 bending
to 4.7.7 do not generally applyto battened members,
which should bethe subject of special study. However, 4.8.1 General
if a battened strut complies with4.7.10.2, it is 4.8.1.1 This clause gives interaction formulae for
pernksible to regard it as monolithic and obtain its checking members subjectedto the following cases of
resistance in the nornml way. combined action effect:
4.7.10.2 To be treated as a monolithic member a (a) caseA, major axis bending with axial force
battened strut should satisfy the following. o;
(Mx +
(a) It should be axially loaded. (b) case B, minor axis bending with axial force
(b) It should comprise two main components joined (My +o;
by equally spaced battens, the cross-section being (c) caseC , biaxial bending (Mx+ My);
symmetrical about an axis n o m d to the battens. (d) caseD, biaxial bending withaxial force
(c) Battens should generallybe in pairs. However, if (Mx +My + P )
the main components are toe-to-toe tees or angles, where
single battens are allowed.
(d) A2 5 0.8A1 P is the axial
force a x i s i i under
where factored loadmg;
Mxand My are the miaxial moments about nwjor
AI and A2 are the Slendernessparametersfor and minor axes respectively arising
column buckling of the complete under factored loading.
member about axes parallel to and
normal to the battens, respectively. 4.8.1.2 %o checks are in general needed, as follows:
(e) A3 I0.7 A2 (a) section check (see4.8.3);
where o>)overall buckling check (see 4.8.4).
The section checkis always needed. The overall
A3 is the slenderness
parameter
forbuckling check may be waived for the following
buckling of one main component circumstances:
between battens, based on column (1) in case A, when P is tensile and also the
or torsional buckling whicheveris member is exempt from lateral torsional buckling
the more critical. (see 4.5.6.2);
(f) The batten system should be designedto resist a (2) in case B, when P is tensile.
total shear force V in the plane of the battens, taken In malong the section checkthe values taken for Pm,
as 2.5 % of the axial force inthe whole member Mmx and Mmy should take due accountof the
under factored l o a m . presence of holes and of HAZ softening
(g) The connection of each batten to each main where
component should be designed to transmit the
following sinlultaneous actions under factored pR!3 is the factored axial resistance of
loading: the cross-section, see 4.6.2 (tension)
(1) longitudinal shear of VdNa. or 4.7.7 (compression);
(2) moment of VdLW acting in the plane of the M s x and Mmy me the factored uniaxial moment
batten; resistances of the cross-section
where: (see 4.5.2), @usted to allow for
coincident shear if necessary
d is the longitudinalspacingbetweencentres (see 4.5.4), about major and minor
of battens; axes respectively.
--``,``,,``,````````,``````,,,,`-`-`,,`,,`,`,,`---

66
O BSI 07-1999
~
STD=BSI BS 8 f i L B : PART 1-ENGL 199L m l b Z V b b 9 079V575 b V 7 m

In making the overall buckling check the values of P M, M

MRS, and M R should~ ~ generally refer to the most -+-+-"51.0
PRS MRSx MRSy
unfavourable section inthe bay considered, taldng When the axial force,P, is tensile, the factored axial
account of local buckling and HAZ softening, but resistance, PRS,should be found from clause4.6.2.3
ignoring holes. HAZ softening
failure). may be ignored when it
occurs at the extreme ends of a spanning,
(local I
i.e. non-cantilever, bay. 4.8.3.2 Other cases
For sections exempt from lateral torsional buckling For casesA, B or C (see 4.8.1.1) the fornwla given
(see 4.5.6.2), shouldbetakenequal to M a x in 4.8.3.1 should be used,with the appropriate
numerator quantity put equalto zero.
where
4.8.4 Overall buckling check
MR, is the factored moment resistance to lateral 4.8.4.1 General
torsional buckling (see4.5.6.3).
For members subjectto axial tension combinedwith
4.8.2 Section classification and local buckling bending the presence of the axial force shouldbe
under combined actions ignored in checking against overall buckling. For
members subject to axial compression with bending,or
4.8.2.1 Section classification to biaxial bending, the appropriate interaction fornwlae
The section should be givena single classification (see 4.8.4.2 to 4.8.4.5) should be satisfied on any
(fully compact, senu-compactor slender) generally in unsupported length liableto buckle.
accordance with4.3.3.2 and 4.3.3.4 (a). All quantities in the interaction fornwlae shouldbe
h so doing, the value of j? for any given element taken as positive.
should be based on a value of g (see figure4.2) 4.8.4.2 Case A (mqjor axis bending with axial
Corresponding to the stress pattern produced in that compression)
(e
element when all the actions M,, My)are applied For caseA both conditions (a) and (b) as follows
sinlultaneously. The quantitiesyo and yc, needed for should be satisfied
figure 4.2, should generally be found using the elastic
neutral axis of the gross section underthe combined (a) prevention of nlajor axis buckling:
actions, although in checking whether a section is fully
--``,``,,``,````````,``````,,,,`-`-`,,`,,`,`,,`---
compact it is permitted to use the plastic one. Note
that it is possible for the elastic neutral axis to lie @) prevention of nunor axis buckling:
-
outside the section, in which case go and yc will be of
the same sign. The method given in4.3.3.5 for P
+ -51.0
a,
determining a more favourable classlfication for under- MRx 6
stressed flange elements, is still valid provided yo and where
gc again relate to the stress pattern under the
combined actions. MX is the equivalent
unifoml
moment,
about the major axis obtained as
Any section found to be fully compact or in 4.5.6.4
senucompact under the above procedureis counted as
compact when obtainingthe axial resistance,no P h and PR^ are the factored axial resistances to
reduction being made for local buckling. overall column buckling, about
major and nxinor axes respectively,
4.8.2.2 Eflectiue section see 4.7.3 and 4.7.4.
For a member classed as slender (see4.8.2.1) each
individual resistance should be found using an effective If the axial forceP causes torsional buckling(see
section that relates specificallyto the action concerned 4.7.5), the factored axial resistances to torsional
(c M, or My), this being generally different for the buckling should be used in (a) and @).
different actions. Thus when obtainingaxial resistance, 4.8.4.3 Case B (minor axis bending with axial
the factor k~ (see figure4.5) for each elementis based compression)
on a P value for that element correspondingto uniform For case B following single condition should be
stress (g = 1). While for fmdmg moment resistance, a P satisfied (preventionof minor axis buckling):
value is taken that relates to the stress pattern in the
element when the section is under pure bending.
4.8.3 Section check
4.8.3.1 General formula (case D)
The cross-section is adequate if the followingis where
satisfied at every position alongthe length, all six
quantities being takenas positive: Xiy is the equivalent ~ n i f o r nmoment
~ about the
minor axis obtained as in 4.5.6.4

Provided by IHS under licenseO BSI 07-1999
with BSI - Uncontrolled Copy
G7
~~~~~ ~ ~~
STD-BSI BS ALLA: PART L-ENGL 1 9 9 1 E Lb24bb9079457b 583 E

BS8118 :Part 1 : 1991 Section 4
4.8.4.4 Case C (biaxial bending) 4.9.2 Recoverable elastic deflection

For case C the following single condition should be 4.9.2.1 Compact sections
satisfied (preventionof minor axis buckling): The elastic deflection of these nlay be calculated using
gross section properties, ignoring holesor HAZ effects.
For beams this applies both to fully and to compact
sections and senu-compact sections.
4.8.4.5 Case D (biaxial bending with axial force) 4.9.2.2 Slender sections
For caseD the condition shouldbe satisfied Deflection calculations should generally
be perfomled
using section properties calculated foran effective
section that allows for localbucklig, but ignores any
effects of HAZ softening or holes. The assumed
effective section maybe conservatively basedon
reduced thicknessesas given in 4.5.2.3(1) for bending,
where or 4.7.6.3(1) for axial conlpression, or the following
M R ~is the valueof that wouldbeacceptablein more favourable procedure may be adopted.
conlbination with4 but in the absence of (a) Reclasse and slender elenlent usinga nlodified
minor axis bending, as given in 4.8.4.3 (lesser value for E in 4.3.3.4, obtained by taking P, equal to
value); two-thirds of the nornlal value given in tables4.1
MRQ is the similar value for By,in the absence of and 4.2.
major axis bending, as given in 4.8.4.4. (b) If the section is then found to be no longer
slender, the gross section propertiesare taken.
(c) If as reclassified, it is still slender,a new
4.9 Deformation (serviceability limit effective sectionis assunled, basedon k~ values
State) found by using the nlodified value of E from (a) for
4.9.1 General figure 4.5.
The recoverable elastic deflection (see 4.9.2) under
nominal loading (unfactored) should not exceedthe
limiting value (see3.4).
If the ultimate l i t state (static strength)has been
satisfied, using4.2 to 4.8, it may be assumed that
pemment inelastic deformationin service will be
negligible. No separate check for this is generally
needed.
--``,``,,``,````````,``````,,,,`-`-`,,`,,`,`,,`---

68
STD*BSI BS B1L8: PART L-ENGL 1991 9 l b 2 9 b b 9 079VS77 lr1T m
Section 5. Plates and plate girders
5.1 General
This section coversthe static strength (ultimatelimit
state) of the following structural components:
(a) unstiffened plates (see5.2 and figure 5.1);
@) multi-stiffened plating (see5.3 and figure5.2);
(c) plate-girders (see 5.4 and figure5.3).
For (a) and (c) the resistance obtained will tend to be
more favourable thanthat based on the simpler rules
of section 4,especially when considering slender plates
--``,``,,``,````````,``````,,,,`-`-`,,`,,`,`,,`---
or webs of low aspect ratio ( d d ) . Multi-stiffened
plating is not covered in section4.
B m
P”--+
Figure 5.2 Multi-stiffened plate
L
c d œ
5 2 Unstiffened plates
Figure 5.1 Unstiffened
plate 5.2.1 General
Unstif‘fened plates subjectto direct stress may be
designed in accordance with 5.2.2 to 5.2.4, and those
loaded in shear in accordance with5.2.5. Lnteraction
effects are covered in 5.2.6.
The plate tluckness is denoted by t throughout.
c
i[
-n
W
U
c
I
t
End
panel
Figure 5.3 Plate girder

Provided by IHS under license BSI 07-1999
Owith BSI - Uncontrolled Copy
69
5.2.2 Unstiffened plates under direct stress (2) Column treatment. k~ is taken equal to the
5.2.2.1 General ratiopdp,, where p , is the column bucklingstress
The resistance of a plate to uniform in-plane read from figure4.10 (a). The appropriate curve to
use is that intersecting the stress axis at a value
conlpression,.F: acting in the direction shown in po. The slenderness parameterA should normally
figure 5.1 is described in 5.2.2.2 to 5.2.2.4. be taken as follows:
5.2.2.2 Classtfication A = 3.5 d t
The plate should be classifiedas follows: corresponding to simple support, although a lower
( 4 ß 5 P1 fully-conlpact; value may be taken if this can be justified.
@Iß1<ß‘ßo senucompact; 5.2.3 Unstiffened plates under in-plane moment
(c) ß ß o slender 5.2.3.1 General
where The resistance of a plate to pure in-plane moment
acting on the sides of width d (see figure 5.1) is
ß = ut; described in 5.2.3.2 to 5.2.3.4. If the moment varies in
ßo and ßI are as given in table 4.3. the direction parallelto dinlension a, see also 5.2.4.
5.2.3.2 Classification
5.2.2.3 Fullg and semi-compactplates
The plate should be classifiedas follows:
The factored axial resistancePRSto uniform
compression should be based onthe least favourable (a>ß 5 P1 fully compact;
cross-section as follows:
(b)ßl<ßSßO semi-compact;
(a) full~conl~act PRS= PrtAndYm (c) ß > ß o slender;
@) semi-compact PRS=
where
where ß = 0.3WG
pa and P, are linuting stresses (see tables 4.1 ß o and P1 are as given in table 4.3.
and 4.2);
5.2.3.3 FullIl and semi-compactplates
Arie is the neteffective area for allowingfor
The factored moment resistanceMB should be based
holes, and takinga reduced thicknesskt
in any region affected byHAZ softening on the least favourable cross-section, using the relevant
(see 4.4.4 and 4.4.3); expression in 4.5.2.2 (a) to (d), and taking anassumed
section as defined in4.5.2.3 (a) or @).
Ym is the nlaterialfactor(seetable 3.3).
5.2.3.4 Slender plates
5.2.2.4 Slender plates The factored moment resistance shouldbe taken as
A yielding check and a buckling check should be the lesser of two values foundas in (a) and (b) as
perfomled, taking valuesas follows for the factored follows.
axial resistancepRs.
(a) Yielding check. MB is obtained as in 5.2.3.3 for
(a) Yielding check. Pm is obtained as in 5.2.2.3 for a a semicompact plate ignoring buckling.
senucompact plate, ignoring buckling.
(b) Buckling check.Mm if found as follows:
(b) Buckling check. Pm = P&&,,
where MRS= P$&m
where
po is the limiting stress (seetables 4.1 and 4.2);
A, is the effectivearea,obtainedby taking 2, is the elastic modulus of the effective section.
reduced thicknessto allow for bucklingas
well as HAZ softening, but with holes The calculation in @) should generally be based on the
ignored. effective sectionat the least favourable position, with
no deduction for holes, takinga thickness equal to the
In @) the effective area should generally be based on lesser of kt and kLt in HAZ regions, and kLt elsewhere.
the least favourable cross-section,taking a thickness However, HAZ softening due to welds at the loaded
equal to the lesser of kt and kLt in HAZ regions, and edges may be ignored in this check.
kLt elsewhere. However, HAZ softening due to welds at The factor kL should be read from curveC or D in
the loaded edges may be ignored in this check. fim4.5, takingß = 0 . W t and E = (250/’0)’.
The factor kL may be determined by the more
favourable of the treatments (1) and (2) as follows.
(1) Plate treatment. k~ is read from curve C or D
in figure 4.5, taliing P = d/t and E = (250/p0)”.
--``,``,,``,````````,``````,,,,`-`-`,,`,,`,`,,`---

70
O BSI 07-1999
STD=BSI BS ALLB: PART L-ENGL 1791 D l b 2 V b b 7 07911577 292 m
Section 5 BS 8118 : Part 1 : 1991
5.2.4 Longitudinal stress gradient on unstiffened (b) Buckling check. The resistancemay be safely
plates found as in 4.5.3.3 (b). Alternatively the following
expression may be used, which is more favourable
5.2.4.1 General
when a is less than 2.M:
Cases wherethe applied actionP or M on an
v, = vlPvd%ll
W f e n e d plate varies longitudinally inthe direction
shown in figure 5.1,are given in 5.2.4.2 and 5.2.4.3. where v1 is the elastic critical shear buckling factor
read from figure 5.4taking E = (150/pv)
I
5.2.4.2 Fullg and semi-compact plates
The expression in 4.5.3.3 @) still fails to take
The factored resistanceat any cross-section should not advantage of tension field action. If it is believed that
be less than the action arisiig at that section under the edge conditionsare such that a tension field is
factored loading. sustainable, the designer nmy refer to the even more
5.2.4.3 Slender plates favourable treatment available for type1 panels in
plate girder webs (see5.4.3.4).
The yielding check shouldagain be satisfied at every
cross-section. But for the buckling check it is sufficient 5.2.6 Combined actions
to compare the factored resistancewith the action 5.2.6.1 Classification
arising at a distance x from the more heavily loaded
A plate, subjected to combined axial force P and
end of the panel, wherex is 0.4 times the elastic plate
buckling half-wavelength. moment M under factored loading should be given a
single classification (fully compact, semi-conlpactor
5.2.5 Unstiffened plates in shear
--``,``,,``,````````,``````,,,,`-`-`,,`,,`,`,,`---
slender) generally in accordancewith 4.8.2.1. In so

5.2.5.1 General doing, the value taken for fi should be based on the
stress pattern produced in the plate whenP and M act
Unstiffened plates undershear should be classified as together, based on an appropriate valueof g (see
compact or slender, as in 4.5.3.1. figure 4.2).
The presence of small holesnmy be ignored when Where the plate is classed as slender, each individual
finding the shear resistance, provided they do not resistance (PRSand MRS) should be based on the
occupy morethan 20 % of the crosssection area on the specific type of action considered,as in 4.8.2.2.
width d.
5.2.6.2 Axial force with moment
5.2.5.2 Compact shear web
The following condition should be satisfiedfor a plate
The factored shear force resistance VRS should be subjected to axial force withmoment
found as follows:
VRS = P ddh
-P M
where -5 1.0
PRS 'MRS
p , is the linuting stress (see tables 4.1 and 4.2);
ym is the material factor (see table3.3). where:
Av is the effective shear area, taken as follows;
P and M are the axialforceandin-plane
(a) for unwelded platesA, = dt; moment respectivelyW i g under
@) for plates fully welded along one or more factored loading.
edges Av = k d t ; PRSand MRS are the factored resistancesto axial
(c) for partially welded plates,A, is the effective force and in-plane moment
area on the width d, found by taking a reduced respectively, each reducedto allow for
thickness kt in softened zones (see4.4.2 coincident high shear if necessary
and 4.4.3). (see 5.2.6.4).
5.2.5.3 Slender shear web 5.2.6.3 Direct stress with low shear
The factored shear force resistance V= should be It may be assumed that a coincident shear force V
taken as the lesser of the two values obtained from(a) (under factored loading) has no effect onthe
and @) as follows. longitudinal resistanceof a plate, provided V does not
(a) Yielding check. The resistance is found as for a exceed half its factored shear force resistance VRS.
compact plate, using5.2.5.2. 5.2.6.4 Direct stress with high shear
If V exceeds 0.5VRS, the longitudinal resistance (axial
force, moment) should be reduced by a factor k,
where:
k, = 1.6 - 1.2 VWRS
~

Provided by IHS under licenseO with BSI - Uncontrolled Copy
71
~~ ~ ~~~ ~
STD.BS1 BS B L L B : PART L-ENGL 3991, m L b 2 4 b b 9 0774580 T04 m

5.3 Multi-stiffened plating The stressp, should be read from the appropriate
curve in figure 4.10 relevant to colunm bucklingof the
5.3.1 General subunit as a simple strut out of the plane of the
The following rules concern plating, supported on all plating.
four edges (see figure5.2), that is reinforced with three The slenderness parameterA needed for figure4.10
or more equally spaced longitudinal stiffeners or may be based on an effective lengthI equal to the
corrugations. Thesemay be unsupported on their lesser of (a) and (b) as follows:
whole length or else be continuous over intemlediate (a) the distance between positionsof effective lateral
tranmerse stiffeners. The dinlensionL should be taken support, such as end supports or effective transverse
as the spacing of the supports when fitted. An essential stiffeners;
feature of the design is that the longitudmal
reinforcement, but not transverse stiffening,is (b) the elastic orthotropic buckling half-wavelength.
'subcritical', i.e. it can deform withthe plating in an The part of figure 4.10 (a), @) or (c) used depends on
overall buckling mode. the section shape of the subunit and whether it
The resistance of such plating to longitudinal direct contains longitudinal welding (see table 4.10),the
stress in the direction of the reinforcement is given actual curve beingthat which intercepts the stress axis
in 5.3.2 to 5.3.4, and to shear in 5.3.5. Interaction at a value pl as defined in 4.7.6.2.The following
between different effects maybe allowed for in the should be noted when deternining the effective
same way as for unstiffened plates (see5.2.6). area A, (needed for findingpl).
The treatments given become invalidif the (1) The value of I ~ Lfor elements such as E in
cross-section contains any outstand elementsthat are figure 5.2 should be basedon their full
classified as slender. dimensions, even though theyare cut in two for
the formation of sub-units.
When the construction consistsof flat plating with
applied stiffeners,the resistance to transverse direct (2) HAZ softening due to welds at the loaded
stress may be taken the Same as for an unstiffened edges or at transverse stiffenersmay be ignored in
plate. With corrugated construction itis negligible. finding A,.
5.3.2 Multi-stiffened plating under uniform 5.3.3 Multi-stiffened plating under in-plane
compression moment
5.3.2.1 General 5.3.3.1 General
' h o checks should be performed,a yielding check Two checks should be performed, a yielding check
(see 5.3.2.2) and a colunm check (see5.3.2.3). The (see 5.3.3.3) and a colunm check (see5.3.3.4).
crosssection should be classied as compact or 5.3.3.2 Section classification and local buckling
slender in accordance with4.3.3, considering all the
The cross-section should be classified as compact or
component elements before carryingout either check.
Slender outstand elementsare not permitted. slender (see4.3.3) when carrying out either check.
For the purpose of classifymg individual elements, and
5.3.2.2 Yielding check also when determiningI ~ Lfor slender elements, itmay
The entire section shouldbe checked for local generally be assumed that each element is under
squashing in the sanle way as for a strut (see 4.7.7). uniform compression takingg = 1 in 4.3.2.2. However,
The resistance qls should be based on the least in the case of the yielding check only, it is permissible
favourable cross-section, taking accountof local to base g on the actual stress pattern in elements
buckling andHAZ softening if necessary, andalso any conlprising the outermost region of the plating, and to
unfilled holes. repeat ths value for the corresponding elements
further in. This may be favourable whenthe number of
5.3.2.3 Column check stiffeners or corrugations is small. Slender outstand
The plating is regarded as an assemblage of identical elements should not be allowed.
--``,``,,``,````````,``````,,,,`-`-`,,`,,`,`,,`---
column subunits, each containing one centrally

located stiffeneror corrugation and witha width equal 5.3.3.3 yielding check
to the pitch W.The factored axial resistancePm is then The entire cross-sectionof the plating should be
taken as: treated as a beam under in-plane bending (see 4.5.2.2).
PRS = P&Y, The factored moment resistanceMm should be based
on the least favourable cross-section, taking accountof
where local buckling and HAZ softening if necessaty, and also
any holes.
P, is the buckhg stress for a colunm s u b unit;
A is the gross area of the entire cross section of
the plating;
ym nlateriaJ factor (see table 3.3).

72
Licensee=Rolls Royce Enterprise Wide/5973912035, User=Wootton, John O
BSI 07-1909
STDOBSI BS BLLB: PART L-ENGL 1991 m L b 2 q b b S 079qSBL 940 m
5.3.3.4 Column check 5.3.5.2 Yielding check

The platmg is regarded as an assemblage of colunu The factored shear force resistance VRS is taken as the
subunits in the sanle general way as for axial same as that for a flat unstiffened plateof the sanle
compression (see 5.3.2.3), the factored moment overall aspect (LB) and the same general thickness t,
resistance MRS being taken as follows: found in accordance with5.2.5.2.
MRS= PszB/2yYm 5.3.5.3 Buckling check
where. The factored shear force resistance is found from the
following:
P, is the buckling stress for columnsub-unit; VFS vlPvBt/y,
2 is the elastic section modulus of the full cross where
section of the plating for in-plane bending;
pv is the limiting stress (see tables 4.1 and 4.2);
B is the overallwidthofplating;
y is the distance from centre ofplating to centre
B is the widthofplating (seefigure5.2);
of outermost stiffener, t is the generalplatethickness;
Ym is the material factor (see table 3.3). ym is the material factor (see table 3.3);
v1 is theelasticcritical shear bucklingfactor
The stress P, should be read from figure4.10 in the (see figure 5.4).
same way as for uniform compression (see5.3.2.3).
In order to calculate v1 the following values should be
5.3.4 Longitudinal stress gradient on used
multi-stiffened plates
5.3.4.1 General a =B ,
Cases wherethe applied action P or M on a d = o.(jl(wt3/Is~)0~~7~;
multi-stiffened plate varies inthe direction of the 1 is the effective length of plating;
stiffeners or corrugations are described in 5.3.4.2 W is the pitch of stiffeners or corrugations;
and 5.3.4.3.
Is11 is the second moment of area of one sub-unit
5.3.4.2 Yielding check of the plating (asdefined in 5.3.2.3) about a
The factored resistance at anycrosssection should be centroidal axis parallelto the plane of the
not less than the action a r i s i i at that section under plating;
factored loading. E = (150/p,) y2.
5.3.4.3 Column check
The effective length1 may be safely taken as the
For the column check itis sufficient to compare the unsupported lengthL (see figure 5.2). WhenL greatly
factored resistance withthe action arising ata exceedsB, a more favourable result may be obtained
distance x from the more heavily loaded endof a by putting 1 equal to the elastic orthotropic shear
panel, wherex is 0.4t h e s the effective buckling buckling half-wavelength.
length l. No allowance for HAZ softening need be made in
5.3.5 Multi-stiffened plating in shear performing the buckling check.
5.3.5.1 General
A yielding check (see 5.3.5.2) and a buckling check
5.4 Plate girders
(see 5.3.5.3) should be performed. The methods given 5.4.1 General
in 5.3.5.2 to 5.3.5.3 are valid provided the following A plate girder is a fabricated bean1 comprising tension
occur. h g e , compression flange and web plate. The webis
(a) The pitch W of the stiffeners or corrugations typically of slender proportions and reinforced
does not exceed 0.3L (see figure 5.2). transversely with bearing and intermediate stiffeners
@) Any outstand elementof the section is classified (see figure5.3). It may have longitudinal stiffeners too.
as compact in terms of axial resistance (see4.3.3.4). A basic feature is that the web stiffenersare designed
to provide supported edges forthe panels of the web,
(c) Any internal elementis classified as compact in staying essentially straightas buckling proceeds.
terms of shear resistance' (see4.5.3.1).
The moment and shear resistances of plate girders
(d) Stiffeners or corrugations, as well as the actual having transversely stiffened webs are covered in 5.4.2
plating, are as follows: and 5.4.3, while 5.4.4 gives the modifications needed
(1) effectively connectedto the transverse framing when longitudinal stiffenersare added. In considering
at either end; moment resistance it is pemussible to follow
(2) continuous at any transverse stiffener position. appendix E instead of 5.4.2, if desired, and economies
nlay result.
--``,``,,``,````````,``````,,,,`-`-`,,`,,`,`,,`--- ~~

O BSI 07-1999
~~
STD-BSI BS 8118: P A R T 1-ENGL 1991 m bb2qbb7 077q582 8 8 7 D

The methods given in 5.4.2, 5.4.3 and 5.4.4 are valid It may be assumed that any tongue-plate, if fitted,
provided the following occur. provides effective edge support to the slender web
(a) The stiffeners comply with5.4.5. plate to which it is joined, provided it complies
with 5.4.5.8. Thus to find k~ for the web plate from
(b) The spacing a of transverse stiffeners is not less
figure 4.5 (b), P may be based on a value of d measured
than half the clear depth of the web between flange to the tip of the tongue or tongues.
plates @ut see 5.4.6 for corrugated or closely
stiffened webs). 5.4.2.4 Alternative treatment of web buckling
It may be beneficial to provide a tongueplate, to one If the neutral axis is located so that it is nearer to the
or both flanges. To be effective this should conlply edge of the web in compression than itis to the one in
with 5.4.5.8. tension, it is permissible to treat the web as composed
Interaction between moment andshear is dealt with of two zones with differing values of k~ obtained as
in 5.4.7. follows.
If web bearing or lateral torsional bucklingis thought (a) Zone 1, extending a distance y1 either side of
to be a factor, the designer should referto 4.5.5 neutral axis. k~ is read from figure 4.5 @) talnng
or 4.5.6. For girders subject to axial load, as well as /3=0.7gl/t where y1 is the distance from the gross
bending, 4.8 is relevant. neutral axis to the compressed edge.
--``,``,,``,````````,``````,,,,`-`-`,,`,,`,`,,`---
The treatment of plate girders given in5.4.2 to 5.4.7 is @) Zone 2, occupying the rest of the web: k~ = 1.0.
also generally applicableto box section girders 5.4.3 Shear resistance of transversely stiffened
provided the webs are sindar in foml. plate girders
5.4.2 Moment resistance of transversely 5.4.3.1 General
stiffened plate girders
A yielding check (see5.4.3.2) and a buckling check
5.4.2.1 General ( s e e 5.4.3.3) should be carried out. For webs with
In order to determine the factored moment resistance continuous longitudinal welds itis also necessary to
a yielding check (see 5.4.2.2) and a buckling check carry out a HAZ check (see 5.4.3.5). The presence of
(see 5.4.2.3) should be performed. small holes in the web platemay be ignored for either
check, provided they donot occupy more than 20 % of
For hybrid girders, with differing flange and web its section area
material, the designer should referalso to 4.5.2.4.
5.4.3.2 Yielding check
5.4.2.2 Yielding check
At any cross-section the shear force Varking under
The moment arisingat any cross-section under factored load should not exceeda value VRS found as
factored load should not exceedthe factored moment follows:
resistance MRS that would apply if the section were
treated as senu-compact. Thevalue of Mm is obtained v, AweIYm;
=h
from 4.5.2.2 @) or (d) as appropriate, taking account (a) no tongueplate
of any holes or HAZ effects, but ignoring local (b) with tongueplate or V, = (pvwAwe +
buckling. plates + hAte)Ym;
5.4.2.3 Buckling check
where
The following treatment appliesto plate girders with
transverse stiffeners,but no longitudinal stiffeners. P,, and p f i are limiting stresses for the weband
For each bay of the girder between transverse tongueplate materials respectively
stiffeners the moment arising under factored load,at a (equivalent to pv in tables 4.1
distance O.& from its more heavily stressed end, and 4.2);
should not exceed the factored moment resistanceMRS
for that bay based onultimate failure by buckling. The Awe is the effective
section area of web
plate between flanges,or to
value of MRs is obtained in accordance with4.5.2.2 (e), tongueplate tips;
allowing for local buckling andHAZ softening, but
ignoring holes. However,it is permissible for the Ate is the effective
section area of
purpose of this check to ignore HAZ effects caused by tongueplate, or total area for two
the welding on of transverse stiffeners. Such;
In considering web bucklig, the effective thickness Ym is the material
factor (seetable 3.3).
factor k~ should generallybe found in accordance
with 4.3.4, talung P as in 4.3.2.2. However, if the The effective areas are obtained takmg reduced
compressed edge of the web is nearer to the neutral thicknesses equal to times the true thickness in any
axis than is the edge in tension, it is permissible HAZ region (see 4.4.2 and 4.4.3).
instead to proceed as in 5.4.2.4, which wil tend to be
more favourable.

~~ ~ ~ ~~
S T D = B S I BS 811B: PART1-ENGL 1971 m 1b211bb7 07711583 713

Section 5 BS 8118 : Part 1 : 1991
5.4.3.3 Buckling check 5.4.3.4 Tensionfield action

In any bay between transverse stiffeners theshear ' h o types of web panel are identified as follows
force Vaxising under factored loading should not (a) ?sTpe 1: Panels able to sustain a tension field,
exceed the limiting value V= for that bay, based on namely:
ultinmte failure by buckling. The value of VRS should
be found using the appropriate expression(a) or (b) as (1) an internal panel;
follows, which take due advantage of post-buckled (2) a panel in an end-bay provided with an
behaviour adequate end-post conlplying with5.4.5.6.
(b) 'Qpe 2 a panel in an end-bay lacking an
I (a) no
tongueplate
adequate end-post.
There is negligible tension field action intype 2 panels,
I @>with
tongueplate or
and for these vtf in 5.4.3.3 should be taken as zero.
m e 1 panels are generally ableto develop further
plates shear resistance after the initial onset of buckling, due
to tension field action. For these vtf should be taken as
where follows:
--``,``,,``,````````,``````,,,,`-`-`,,`,,`,`,,`---
d is the depth of webmeasuredbetweenflanges,

or to tongue-plate tips; (i) unwelded
panel Vtf = v2 + mv3;
t is the unreducedthickness ofweb plate; (i)panelwithedgewelds vtf = k; +
v1 is the initial shear bucklig factor read from

figure 5.4 taking E = (1501'p~)~; where m is the lesser of ml and q
vtf is the tension field factor (see 5.4.3.4).
The other quantities are as defined in 5.4.3.2.
1.0
o. 9
0.8
O .7
0.6
"I
O. 5
0.4
O.3
o. 2
o. I
O
O 40 80 120 160 200 240 280 d/t&
NOTE. For longitudinally stiffened panels d should be taken as the depth of the largest sub-panel.
Figure 5.4 Elastic critical shear buckling factor v1
I 1

Provided by IHS under license with BSI - Uncontrolled Copy, O BSI 07-1999 Licensee=Rolls Royce Enterprise Wide/5973912035, User=Wootton, John 75
where should be suitably sharedin obtaining Sf for each web.
5.4.3.5 HAZ check
Pi? is the shear buckling
factor, For webs with longitudinal weldsthe shear force T/:
determined from figure5.5;
arising under factored load, should not exceedthe
v3 is the shear buckling
factor, factored shear force resistance VRS at any such weld,
determined from figure5.6; where VRS is given as follows:
is the HAZ softering factor (see4.4.2);
k;
ml and are shear buckling
factors
where
ml is the determined from figure5.7;
where
m2 = (4PofSf~P0wd2~>
%
--``,``,,``,````````,``````,,,,`-`-`,,`,,`,`,,`---
where I is the second moment of area of the gross
cross section;
p0f and P,, are linuting stresses po for flange is the first moment of gross excluded area
and web material (see figure 4.1); outside the weld
Sf is the plastic
modulus of effective
flange section about its own equal where
area axis, in the plane of the web
(the lower value is taken if the is the section area
flanges are different). is the distance of the centroid of the neutral
axis to this area
In deteminhg Sf the section considered should and /c;, pm and y,, are as defined in 5.4.3.2
include the flange plate together with tongue plate if
present, with suitable thickness reductionto allow for and 5.4.3.4.
local buckling and HAZ softening (see 4.5.2.3), but
with no deduction for holes. If the girder has two or
more webs, the plastic modulus of the whole flange
"2 a/d
0.50
O. 4
0.75
1.0
0.3
1.5
0.2
2.0
22.5
0.1
O 40 80 120 160 200 240 280 d/ts

NOTE. The figure should not be used for panels with longitudinal stiffeners.
Figure 5.5 Basic tension field shear buckling factor
76
O BSI 07-1999
STD.BSI BS 8118: PART L-ENGL 1991 m L b 2 4 b b 9 0799585 59b W
“J
2.0
1.8
1.6
1.4
1.2
1.0
0.8
0.6
0.4
0.2
O 40 80 120 160 200 240 280 d / t &

NOTE. This figure should not be used for panels with longitudinal stiffeners
Figure 5.6 Flange assisted tension field shear buckling factor v3
m, a/d
0.7
22.5
0.6 2.0
1.5
0.5
1.0
0.4 0.75
0.3 0.50
0.2
0.1
O 40 80 120 160 200 240 280 d / t &

NOTE. This figure should not be used for panels with longitudinal st,iffeners.
Figure 5.7 Shear buckling factor ml
--``,``,,``,````````,``````,,,,`-`-`,,`,,`,`,,`---

Provided by IHS under license BSI 07-1999
Owith BSI - Uncontrolled Copy
77
5.4.4 Longitudinally and transversely stiffened @) type B, bearing stiffener: transverse stiffenerat
girders point of concentrated load or reaction;
5.4.4.1 Moment resistance (c) type C, longitudinal stiffener spanning
The procedure for determiningthe moment resistance longitudinally between transverse stiffeners.
is basically as for girders having transverse stiffeners
only, and involvesa yielding check anda buckling In order that predicted resistancesmay be achieved, it
check. The yielding check is as given in 5.4.2.2. is genemlly necessary that web stiffeners comply with
In making the buckling check (see5.4.2.3) it is the following:
assumed that each longitudinal stiffener providesa line (1) types A,B,C: compactness (see5.4.5.2);
of support to the web, thus dividing it into separate
sub-panels fromthe point of view of local buckling. In (2) types A,B,C: s m e s s (see 5.4.5.4);
determining the effective section of the girder, (3) types A,B only: stability (see 5.4.5.5).
improved values of kL may be used for the sub-panels.
These are obtained by taking the correct width and A transverse stiffener should extend without break
stress pattern for each sub-panel in d e t e r n m g its from flange to flange, even when tongue, platesare
value. fitted. Where a bearing stiffener, proper provision
5.4.4.2 Shear resistance should be madeat the flange for transferringthe
applied force intothe stiffener. It is not essential for
The yielding check (see 5.4.3.2) and the HAZ check
(see 5.4.3.5) are unaffected by the presence of the stiffener to be connected to the flanges.
longitudinal stiffeners. Where possible longitudinal stiffeners should be made
The buckling check shouldbe carried out genemlly in continuous from one web bayto the next. Where this
accordance with 5.4.3.3, but with v1 and VE found as is not possible, the separate lengths shouldabut on to
follows: the transverse stiffener dividing them.
(a) the value of vl is deternmed from figure 5.4, 5.4.5.2 Compactness
taking d equal to the depth of the largest sub-panel All stiffeners should beof compact section in temw of
(instead of the full web depth); resistance to axial compression (see 4.3.3.4).
@) the value of vtf is calculated using equation(i) or 5.4.5.3 Eflective stwener section
(ii) in 5.4.3.4 as appropriate, with factors %, v3 and
m obtained as follows: The effective stiffener section is used in checking the
(1) the value of m is taken as the lesser of ml and
stiffness and stability requirements. It consists of the
actual stiffener,or pair of stiffeners if double-sided,
mz; together with an effective widthbe of web plate (see
(2) the values 3, v3 and ml are calculated using figure 5.8). The latter extends a distance bl either side
the formulae in appendix K that relate to of the stiffener attachmentor attachments as shown,
figures 5.5 to 5.7 respectively, takingd as the full and is given generally by the following:
depth as defined in 5.4.3.3, and v1 as the value
found in (a) above. (a) for a transverse bl = lesser of 0.1% and
NOTE. Figures 5.5 to 5.7 should not be used for web panels stiffener, 15ct
with longitudinal stiffeners.
NOTE. For a transverse stiffener located at an end of the girder
(3) m2 is calculated as in 5.4.3.4, taking d as the value of b, on the outboard side (only) should be taken as
defined in 5.4.3.3.
--``,``,,``,````````,``````,,,,`-`-`,,`,,`,`,,`---
follows, instead of the value given in(a):

5.4.5 Web stiffeners and tongue-plates b , = lesser of a, and 7 ~ t
5.4.5.1 General where a, is the distance from the stiffener to the fret? edge of
The following types of web stiffener are considered the web plate.
(see figure 5.3). They may be single- or double-sided @) For a longitudinal bl = lesser of 0.13davand
stiffener, 15~t
(a) type A, intermediate stiffener transverse stiffener
other than that covered by type B;
Figure 5.8 Effective stiffener section

78
where It is inlportant to allow for the bending effects that will
be introduced, if there is eccentricity between the l i e
E = (150/Pv)”; of action of P and the centroidal axis of the effective
pv is the linuting stress for webmaterial(see section. This nmy be undertaken usingthe interaction
tables 4.1 and 4.2); formulae given in 4.8.3 and 4.8.4.4 where My is the
moment due to the action and Mx = O. Such
dav is the averagedepth of the twosub-panels eccentricity occurs especially when single-sided
lying either side of the longitudinal stiffener. stiffeners are used.
5.4.5.4 Stmness 5.4.5.6 End posts required to resist tension field
For the panel proportionsgiven, the second moment of When detem- the shear force resistanceof an end
area I , of the full section of the effective stiffener bay of a plate @er, it is only pernutted to take
(see 5.4.5.3) about a centroidal axis pasallel to the web advantage of tension field actionif an adequate
should satisfy the following: end-post is provided at the outer end of the web panel.
This should be designed to perfornl two functions as
(a) for a transverse I, 2 d t 3 ( ~ d / ,- 0.7); follows, although interaction between the two effects
stiffener ( d d I2.5), may be ignored:
(a) to act as a bearing stiffener, resistingthe reaction
(b) for a longitudinal 1, 2 Ug(2ddav - 0.7).
at the girder support;
stiffener (da& 5 2.!5),
@) to act as a short beam spanning betweenthe
The stiffness conditionnlay be waived when the panel girder flanges, resistingthe tension field inthe plane
proportions lie outside the range indicated. of the web.
An end-post may be either of the following forms, in
5.4.5.5 Stability (Dansverse stmeners onlu) either case securely connected to both of the girder
The effective stiffener section (see5.4.5.3) is flanges.
considered as a strut carrying a thrust P under (1) It may conlprise two double-sided transverse
--``,``,,``,````````,``````,,,,`-`-`,,`,,`,`,,`---
factored loading given by the following: stiffeners, formingthe flanges of the short beam,
together with a strip of web plate between them.
(a) for a intermediate P = VB, One of the transverse stiffeners shouldbe suitably
stiffener, located so as to fulfil the bearing role.
@) for a bearing P=P1 + V A (2) It may be in the foml of inserted material,
stiffener, connected to the end of the web plate.
where In performing function @), the end-post has to resist a
shear force Vep together with a moment M, acting in
V is the averagevalue of the shear force the plane of the web plate (under factoredLading),
arising in the web panels either sideof the given by the following:
stiffener considered
P1 is the concentratedload or reactionacting
at stiffener.
Mep = 0.1 dVq
The value of P should not exceed the factored axial
resistance of the strut, as determined from 4.7 taking where
account of column buckling (out of the plane of the
web) and local squashing, but ignoring torsional 9 is the mean shear stress arismg in end-
buckling. In considering column bucklingan effective panel of web under factored loading,
strut length 1 should be taken as follows: based on unreduced thickness;
Pv is the limiting stress for webmaterial(see
(1) for d d 2 1.5, I = d; tables 4.1 and 4.2);
(2) for d d < 1.5, 1 = d(1.6 - 0.4 dd)% v1 and 212 are factors relating to end-panels found
from figures 5.4 and 5.5, or from 5.4.4.3
When the panel dimension a is different on opposite ( i longitudinally stiffened).
sides of the stiffener, an average value should be taken
for it in the expressions in (1) and (2). For any end In calculating q it is pemkssible to assume that part of
stiffener 1 = d. the shear force on the girder is carried by the
tongueplates, if fitted.

Provided by IHS under license Qwith BSI - Uncontrolled Copy RSI 07-1999 Licensee=Rolls Royce Enterprise Wide/5973912035, User=Wootton, John 79
5.4.5.7 End-posts required to resist torsion 5.4.6 Use of corrugated or closely stiffened
If an end-post is the sole means of providing resistance webs
against twist at the end of a girder, the following 5.4.6.1 General
should be met:
Girders having transverse web reinforcement in the
form of cormgations or closely-spaced stiffeners,at a
pitch less than 0.3 times the depth between flanges, i.e.
failing to satisfy 5.4.l(b), are described in 5.4.6.2
where and 5.4.6.3.
This transverse reinforcement is treated as subcritical,
lep is the secondnloment of area of the in that it may deform with the web in an overall
end-post section aboutthe centre-line of the buckling mode and hence not necessarily
web; satisfy 5.4.5.4 and 5.4.5.5.
d is the depth ofweb measuredbetween 5.4.6.2 Moment resistance
flanges, or to tongue-plate tips; When the web consists of a flat plate with applied
tr is the flangethickness(taken as the stiffeners, the moment resistance should be foundas
nwximunl value whenthe thickness varies in 5.4.2. But with a corrugated web it shouldbe
along the girder); assunled that the web contributionis zero, the moment
R is the reaction at the end of the girder resistance being provided solelyby the flanges.
considered, under factored loading; 5.4.6.3 Shear force resistance
W is the total factoredloadingon the adjacent The factored shear force resistance VRS should be
span. determined as in 5.3.5 for multi-stiffened plating in
shear.
5.4.5.8 lbngue-plates
5.4.7 Girders under combined moment and shear
A tongueplate comprises nlaterial extending in froma
flange to form a thickened outer part to the web. To be Rgures 5.9(a) and (b) show schenlatically the form of
effective its dinlensions should be suchthat it is the nlonlent-shear interaction diagramfor plate
conlpact when consideredas a plain outstand in axial girders, covering:
conlpression (see4.3.3). (a) bays unable to sustain a tension field;
When a tongue is of t w or~ three-ply construction, (b) bays with tension field action.
comprising the web-plate connected to an element or Such a diagram may be constructed, for any given bay
elements integral with the flange, the thickness t between transverse stiffeners,in order to determine
reqyired for checlungits compactness nmy be taken as the factored nloment resistanceMRSO in the presence
the total thickness. However, in rivetedor bolted of a coincident shear force V (arising under factored
construction, itis also necessary to check that any loading). The notation is as follows:
outstand beyond the last line of rivets or bolts is in MRS is the factored nlonlent resistance inthe
itself compact. absence of shear (see 5.4.2 and 5.4.4.2);
MRFis the reduced value of MRS for the flanges on
their own, with web onutted
V m is the factored shear force resistance (see5.4.3
and 5.4.4.3);
VRWis the reduced value forVm obtained by
putting m = O (see 5.4.3.4, and 5.4.4.3).
--``,``,,``,````````,``````,,,,`-`-`,,`,,`,`,,`---

O BSI 07-1999
STD.BSI BS 8118: PART L-ENGL 1991 Lb2qbb7 077ri589 131 m
(a)field
No tension @) With
fieldtension
Figure 5.9 Schematic interaction diagrams for plate girders
--``,``,,``,````````,``````,,,,`-`-`,,`,,`,`,,`---

O ES1 07-1999
~~
STD-BSI BS ALLA: PART L-ENGL 1791 D L b 2 4 b b 9 079q590 9 5 3 D

BS 8118 : Part 1 : 1991 Section 6
Section 6.Static design of joints
6.1 General 6.2.2 Groups of fasteners

This section deals with the design of joints made by Groups of rivets, boltsor special fasteners, known
u sq fasteners, adhesives, or by welding. The collectively as ‘fasteners’,f o r n ~ ag connection, should
following typesof fastener are discussed: rivets, black be designed on the basis of a realistic assumption of
bolts, close tolerance bolts, high strength friction grip the distribution of internal forces, having regard to
bolts (HSFG bolts), special fasteners and pins. For relative stiffness. Itis essential that equilibrium with
--``,``,,``,````````,``````,,,,`-`-`,,`,,`,`,,`---
joints made by welding,the design resistance of butt the external factored loadsbe maintained.
and fillet welds is defined. The design of joints 6.2.3 Effect of cross-sectional areasof plies
between cast or forged elements should be carried out
in conjunction with the manufacturers. The design of the plies at sections containing holesfor
fasteners should be based on ninhunl net areas,
The following types of connectionare called joints: except for rivets in compression. In certain friction
(a) connections between structural members,e.g. grip boltedjoints the linut state is met by the friction
bean1 to column; capacity of the joint, and in these circumstancesthe
(b) connections betweenthe elements of a ‘built-up’ design should be based on minimum gross areas.
member, e.g. webs to flanges, splices; 6.2.4 Long joints
(c) connections between localized details and When the length of a joint, measured between centres
structural members, e.g. bracketto beam, lug and of end fasteners in the direction of transmission of the
clevis in a tension member. load, is more than 15&(where G$ is the nonlinal
All types of connection should be designedto meet the dianleter of the fastener), or when the number of
h u t states of static strength and fatigue.No checks for fasteners in this dn-ection exceeds five, the designer
serviceability h u t states are required, except for pin should take account of the reduction in the average
joints in structures that are frequently assembled and strength of individual fasteners due to uneven
disassenlbled, forjoints where deflections are critical distribution of the load between them.
or, for friction grip bolted joints, where slipis to be
prevented. The factored loadmg ona joint should be
calculated using the load factors given in section 3. 6.3 Riveted and boltedjoints: geometrical
Fasteners subjectto reversal of load should be either and other general considerations
close toleranceor turned barrel bolts, solid rivets, 6.3.1 Minimum spacing
HSFG bolts, or special fastenersthat prevent
nlovement. The spacing betweencentres of bolts and rivets should
be not less than 2.5 times the bolt or rivet dianleter.
Hollow rivets and other special fasteners which do not Closer spacingis permitted for HSFG bolts, limited by
comply with British Standardsmay be used provided the size of the washer, bolt headsor spanners, and the
their performance has been demonstmted to the need to meet the linut states.
satisfaction of the designer by testingor other means.
They should be spaced and designedby liaison 6.3.2 Maximum spacing
between the designer and the manufacturer. In In tension membersthe spacing of a x e n t bolts or
demountable joints with steel fasteners threadinserts rivets on a line in the direction of stress should not
should be used in any threaded aluminium elementof exceed 16t or 200 nun, where t is the thickness of the
the joint. Their performance should be demonstrated thinnest outside ply. In conlpression or shear nlenlbers
to the satisfaction of the designer by testing or other it should not exceedSt, or 200 nun. In addition, the
means. spacing of Nacent bolts or rivets on a line macent
and parallelto an edge of an outsideply should not
6.2 Riveted and boltedjoints design exceed St or 100 mm. Where rivets and bolts are
staggered on adjacentlines, and the lines are not more
considerations than 75 mm apart, the above limits may be increased
6.2.1 General by 50 O h
Joints using rivets or bolts should be designedso that In any event, the spacing of d a c e n t rivets and bolts,
under the factored load the loading actionat any whether staggeredor not, should not exceed32t
fastener positiondoes not exceed the factored or 300 mm in tension membels, and20t or 300 nun in
resistance of the fastener there. compression andshear memberrs.

S2
These reconmendations apply only to lap and cover 6.3.7 Long grip rivets
plate joints between flat plates. The spacing of bolts The grip length of rivets should not exceed five times
and rivets in spigot joints, joints between tubular the hole dianleter.
nlenlbers and between parts of very disshular
thicknesses should bedeternined from consideration 6.3.8 Washers and locking devices
of the local geometry and the loading on the joint. Washers should beused in accordance with 2.3 of
6.3.3 Edge distance BS 8118 : Part 2 : 1991. Locking devices approved by
The edge distance, measured from the centreof the the engineer should be usedon nuts liable to work
rivet or bolt, for extruded, rolled or nmchined edges, loose because of vibration or stress fluctuation.
should be not less than 1.5 t h e s the rivet or bolt
6.3.9 Intersections
dianleter. If, on the bearing side, the edge distance is
less than twicethe diameter, the bearing capacity Members meeting at a joint should norndly be
should be reduced (see 6.4.4). If the edges are arranged with their centroidalaxes meeting at a point.
sheared, the above linuts should be increased by In the case of bolted framing of angles and tees, the
3 nun. setting out linesof the bolts may be used instead of
6.3.4 Hole clearance the centroidal axis.
The hole clearance can be slightly greater than allowed
in table 3.1 of BS 8118 : Part 2 : 1991. A clearance of 6.4 Factored resistanceof individual
1.6 null is allowable. Bolts that transnut fluctuating rivets and bolts other than HSFG bolts
loads, other than wind loads, should be close-fitting,or
HSFG. complying with British Standards
6.3.5 Packing 6.4.1 Limiting stresses
Where fasteners are carrying shear through a packhg, The linutingstress pf for solid rivets and boltsis
a reduction of the factored design resistance should be defined as follows.
taken into accountif the thickness of packing exceeds
25 % of the fastener diameter,or 50 % of the ply (a) Steel fasteners:pf is the guaranteed minimum
thickness. yield stress for the bolt or rivet stock.
6.3.6 Countersinking (b) Stainless steel bolts and stainless steel rivets:
Onehalf of the depth of any countersinking of a rivet pf is the lesser of O. 5v0.2 + fJ and 1. 2f0.2.
or bolt should be neglected when calculating its length (c) AlunWun~bolts and rivets: valuesof pf for the
in bearing. No reduction is nece- for rivets or bolts aluminiunl alloys in table 2.3 are given in table 6. 1.
in shear. The factored design resistancein axial tension Where the shear strength value is available, derived
of a countersunk rivet or bolt should be takenas from tests on the bolt or on the rivet in the as-dnven
twc+third.s of that of a plain rivet or bolt of the sanle condition (see BS 1974l) for large dmleter rivets),
dianleter. The depth of countersinking should not this nmy be used. In this case, as,in the expression
exceed the thickness of the countersunk part for VRS in 6.4.2 should be reduced from 0.6 to 0.33.
less 4 nun, otherwise performance should be
demonstrated by testing.
I Table 6.1 Limiting stress pf for aluminium fasteners
Fastener type Alloy Condition supplied Method of driving Diameter P,
null N/rnl2
Bolts 6082 T6 56 165
6 to 12 175
6061 T8 5 12 175
5056A H24 5 12 175
Rivets 5154A Cold or hot 120
5154A Cold 140
6082 Cold 110
6082 Cold 165
5056A Cold or hot 145
5056A Cold 155
')Obsolescent standard.
--``,``,,``,````````,``````,,,,`-`-`,,`,,`,`,,`---

O BSI 07-1999
83
6.4.2 Shear The bearing capacity of the connected ply is given by
The factored resistance(V,) of a single rivet or bolt either of the following, whicheveris the lesser:
in single shear is taken as:
VRS = asPde&Ym
where
where
pf is as defined in 6.4.1;
= 0.6 for aluminium bolts or rivets; e is the distance from centre of hole to the
aaacent edge in the direction the fastener bears;
a, = 0.7 for steel bolts or rivets;
c = 2 when df/t 10;
ym is the material factor, and is equal to 1.2 for all
bolts and rivets, i.e. aluminiun~,steel and = 2Wdf when 10 df/t < 13;
stainles steel (see table3.3). = 1.5 when &/t < 13;
For bolts: P, for the material of the connected ply is the lesser
of 0.5(f0.2 +fJand 1.2fo.z (see tables 4.1 and
A,, = Ath, the stress area of the threaded part of the 4.2).
bolt, when the shear plane passes throughthat area;
or
6.4.5 Combined shear and tension
A,, = ASH,the area of the shank, when the shear
plane pases through the shank. When bolts or rivets (exceptau l nmun~rivets see
6.4.3) are subjected to both shear and tension the
following condition should be satisfied (
iaddition to
For rivets: 6.4.2 and 6.4.3):
A,, = Ah, the area of the hole; (PPE# + (V/vRS)25 1
KI = 1.0 forrivets; where
= 0.96 for close tolerance bolts;
P is the axial tensile load arising under factored
= 0.85 for n a m d clearance bolts. loading;
6.4.3 Axial tension V is the shear load arising under factored loading;
The factored resistance, PRT, for a single fastener in . is the factored resistance in axial tension;
axial tension is taken as V, is the factored resistance in shear.
--``,``,,``,````````,``````,,,,`-`-`,,`,,`,`,,`---
&r = aPf A t d h
where
6.5 High strength friction grip (HSFG)
pr, Atb and ym are as definedin.6.4.1 and 6.4.2; 6.5.1 General
a .- = 1.0 for steel and stainlesssteel
Only pre-loaded general grade HSFG bolts in
bolts and rivets; accordance with BS 4395 : Part 1 should be used for
a = O. G for aluminium bolts. alunwun~structures. Design nmy be based on
calculations forjoints where the proof strength of the
The use of aluminium rivets in tension is not nwerial of the connected parts exceeds 230 N/nm2.
recommended. For connected parts manufactured from nlaterial with
6.4.4 h a r i
n g a proof strength lessthan 230 N/nmi2, the strength of
The effective factored resisbnce in bearing for a rivet joints using general grade HSFG bolts should be
or bolt is the lesser of the factored resistance in proved to the satisfaction of the engineer by testing. In
bearing of the single fastenerBRFand the bearing alunIMm structures the relaxation of bolt preload
capacity of the connected ply BRF
due to tension in the joined nlaterial cannot be
ignored.
The fsctored mistance in bearing, BRRfor a single
fastener is taken as The themul expansion of dunmum exceeds that of
steel andthe variation in bolt tension due to change of
BRF= dr &PUYnl tenlperature cannot be ignored. Reducedtenlpemre
where reduces friction capacity and increased temperature
increases the tensile stress in the bolt and the bearing
df is the n o n W dianleter of fastener; stress under the washers. These effectsare only
t is the thickness of connected ply; significant for extremesof temperature change and
pf is defined for steel and alunIMun~fasteners in long grip lengths.
6.4.1;
ym is the materid factor (see table 3.3).

84
6.5.2 Ultimate limit state (static strength) 6.6 Pinned joints
For HSFG bolts in n o d clearance holes, as specified
in table 3.1 of BS 8118 : Part 2 : 1991, the ultimate 6.6.1 General
capacity is the lesser of the shear capacity as In a pinned joint the parts are connected by a single
determined in 6.4.2 or the bearing capacityas pin, which allows rotation. There is no axial load in
determined in 6.4.4. the pin, and therefore no clamping action onthe parts
to be connected. pins may not be loadedin single
6.5.3 Friction capacity shear, so one of the nlenlbem to be joined should have
The factored resistance in shear depends on the a fork end, or clevis. The pin retaining system, e.g. a
friction capacity of an HSFG bolt, where the friction spring clip, shouldbe designed to withstand a lateral
capacity (Fc,) is given by the following: load equal to 10 % of the total shear load on the pin.
Fc = Pp PS NFh m 6.6.2 Solid pins
where Consideration should be givento bending stresses in
pins, and forthis purpose the effective span is taken as
(see 6.5.5);
--``,``,,``,````````,``````,,,,`-`-`,,`,,`,`,,`---
PP is the prestressload the distance between centres of bearings. However,if
ps is the slipfactor (see 6.5.6); the bearing plates havea thickness greater thanhalf
the pin dianleter, consideration may be givento the
Ym = 1.33 if the value of ps is taken as 0.33, variation of bearing pressureacross the plate thickness
Ym = 1. 1 if the value of ps is foundfromtests; when determining the effective span.
NF is the number of frictioninterfaces. If the pin is to be removed to dismantle the structure,
and reinserted to reassemble the structure, the
6.5.4 Serviceability limit state (deformation) cross-section of the pin should be checked for a
The serviceability limitstate for a connection nmde serviceability limit associated withthe linut of elastic
with HSFG bolts is reached when the shear load behaviour. The followingstresses should not be
applied to any bolt equals its friction capacity, exceeded under the factored load:
determined from 6.5.3. For the serviceability limitstate
check = 1.2. (a) mean shear stress inpin: O. GpfIy”,;
6.5.5 Prestress (b) bending stresspin:
1.2PdYm;
in
The prestress load for a HSFG bolt should be taken as where
follows:
PP = P,- 0.9s,, pa is defined for steel and alununiwu pins in
where 6.4.1;
yn, is the material factor (see table 3.3).
P,, is the proofload of the bolt(seetable4 of
BS 4395 : Part 1 : 1969); If the pin is in a pernment installation, a fully plastic
s,b is the appliedexternaltensileload in the distribution of bending stress may be assumed at the
axial direction of the bolt (if any). factored design load.
6.6.3 Members connected by pins
6.5.6 Slip factor
The following rules should not be used whenthe line
Where all the connected parts are of aluninium alloy of action of the load is in a direction other than the
and the friction interfaceshave been treated to ensure dlrection of the grain flow in the connected parts.
consistent friction propertiesby blastmg with
alunwium oxide G38 grit complying with BS 2451, a The net areaacross the pin hole, nornd to the axis of
value of ps = 0.33 nmy be assumed provided thetotal a pin-connected tension member should be at least
thickness of the connected parts exceeds the bolt 1.33pYm/”al and the thickness of the connected
diameter, and the gross area stress in the parts does member should be at least pY,,,Il.Gp,df for permanent
not exceed O.Gf0.2, (wherefo.2 is the 0.2 % tensile proof installations or pYmIl.4p& for demountable ones,
strength of the plate material). where
If one or more of the above conditionsare not
complied with pusshould be deternwed from tests in P is the axial factoredload;
accordance with BS 4GO4 :“Part1. pa is defined in 4.2 for the material of the
The number of bolts needed to obtain the friction connected member;
capacity to satisfy 6.5.4, when talung ps = 0.33,may be df is the pindianleter;
greater than the number needed to satisfy the ultimate
limit state (see 6.5.2). In such cases it may be
ym is the nmterial factor (see table 3.3).
advantageous to develop a surface treatment forthe
interfaces which will increasethe slip factor.
O BSI 07-19N
E5
~~~
STDmBSI BS 8114: PART I-ENGL 1771 m lb21ibb9 0791i571i 5T9 D

BS 811s : Part 1 : 1991 Section G
The n e t nl-t3a o f m y stwion 0 1 1 t9tht.r side of the axis Tlus reconuuendation includes welded attachments,
o f the nltmbcr, nwnsnrt~dn t :u1 mglr of 43" or less to whether or llot they are required to transnut load from
the asis o f the men1ber. sllould br at lrast 0.9Pym/pi,. the menlber.
Thr net n-idth of tlw bearing plate a t tlw pin hole, I
6.7.3 Effect of welding on fatigue strength
measul-rd no11nal to the axis of the member, should The fatigue strength of a joint. depends onthe severity
not escerd eight times the tldchess of the bearing
of the stress concentration, which can arise fromthe
plate. overall geometry of the joint as well as the local
The diameter of the pin hole should not exceed the pin geometry of the weld. Fatigue classifkations of
diameter by more t l m 5 "O. conmlonly used joint detailsare referred to in 7.3. The
P111 plates. and any connections between them and the fatigue classificationmay be used to select the detail
menlber. should be designed to cany a share of the appropriate to the application that gives the best
total axial load in proportion to the plate's shxe of the fatigue resistance.
total beaing xea of the pin. 6.7.4 Corrosion
Joints should be detailedso that inaccessible pockets
6.7 Welded joints or crevices capableof retaining moistureor dirt are
6.7.1 General avoided. Where cavitiesare unavoidable, they should
be sealed by weldingor protective compounds, or
--``,``,,``,````````,``````,,,,`-`-`,,`,,`,`,,`---
The design guidance given here applies onlyto welds made accessible for inspection and maintenance.
made in accordance with 3.9 of BS 8118 : Part 2 : 1991
using the reconmended combinations of parent and 6.7.5 Edge preparations
fdler matelial given in table 2.8 of this Part. Edge preparations forwelded joints, includingbutt and
The \-elsath& of welding enables joints between fillet welds, includingthe use of permanent or
menlbels to be made in different ways. In selecting the tempomy backing bars, are given in BS 3019 : Part 1
type of joint to be used. the designer should consider and BS 3571 : Part 1. The actual preparation shouldbe
the follo\ving: approved as part of the welding procedure. Welding
(a) the effect of the joint on the static strength of positions are defined in BS 499 : Part 1.
the member (see 4.4); 6.7.6 Distortion
(b) the effect of the joint on the fatigue strength of Every weld causes shrinkage and distortion, andthe
the member (see section 7); effects are more marked in aluminium construction
(c) the reduction of stress concentration by suitable than in steel. Shrinkage and distortion should be
choice of detail; compensated or balanced so as to nlaintain the desired
(d) the choice of detail that enables good welds to shape and dinlension of the finished structure.The
be made and properly inspected; designer should consultthe fabricator in the early
stages of design about weldmg method, distortion and
(e) the choice of detail that avoids general corrosion, related aspects such as welding sequences andthe use
and local corrosion due to crevices (see 4.3 of of jigs.
BS 8118 : Part 2 : 1991);
(0 the effects of welding distortion. 6.7.7 Information given to fabricator
Drawings and specifications shouldbe provided, giving
6.7.2 Effect of welding on static strength the followmg infommtion about everyweld
Welding can affect the strengthof the parent metal in (a) parent and filler material;
the vicinity of the weld, as described in detail in
(b) dimensions of weld (see BS 499 : Part 2 for
section 4.For non-heat-treatable alloysin the O or F
condition the softening effectis insigrufcant and HAZ correct use of symbols);
effects can be ignored. The jointis therefore as strong (c) edge preparation andweldmg position;
as the unwelded parent metal.In heat-treatable alloys (d) welding process;
in most heat-treated conditions (6 * :i*: and 7 * * (e) special requirements, suchas smoothness of
series), and in non-heat-treatable alloysin any weld profde, and the preheat and interpass
work-hardened condition (5 :k 'k series), welding temperature;
reduces strength. For exceptionsto this general rule
see table 4.5, & = 1 (f) quality control requkments (seeBS 8118 : Part 2)
for
In members made from materialthat suffers strength
reduction, the weld should prefembly be parallel to the (1) weld procedure approv&
direction of the applied load; welds transverseto the (2) welder approv&
applied load should be avoided if possible, or (3) weld quality class (see notes 1 to 3);
positioned in regions of low stress.

86
(4) levels of inspection of welded joints; In a line of intemuttent welds there shouldbe a weld
(5) acceptance levels for weld quality; at each end of the part connected.
(G) weld repair procedure. The design resistanceof a fillet welded jointis
NOTE 1 Where a weld quality class is not specified on the given in 6.9.2.
drawing ‘normal’ weld qualityis assumed. A fillet weld should be continued aroundthe corner at
NOTE 2. Where the actions under factored loading do not exceed the end or side of a part, for a length beyond the
one-third of the factored resistance of the member or joint, e.g. corner of not less than twice the leg length of the
stiffness may dictate, a lower quality and degree of inspection is weld. See 4.4.3.6 for the effect of overlapping H A Z S .
acceptable. This should apply to both static and fatigue resistance.
In this case ‘minimum’ quality level may be specified. If two longitudinal fillet welds aloneare used in a
NOTE 3. Where joints are designed on fatigue strength lapjointed end connection, the length of each should
requirements, refer to 7.8.5. be not lessthan the distance between them.
6.7.8 Butt welds The throat of a fillet weld a t ) , see figure 6.2 (a), is the
Single-sided partial penetration and intermittent butt height of a triangle that can be inscribed within the
welds should notbe used to transmit tensile forces, weld and measured perpendicularto its outer side.
nor to transmit a bending monlent aboutthe Exceptionally a fillet weld throat can be takento
longitudinal axis of the weld. include any specified penetration,Pt, provided
procedure trials show to the satisfaction of the
The effectivethroat thickness of a partial penetration engineer that this penetration can be consistently
butt weld (see figures GA@) and (c)) should be taken achieved. A large throat nmy be assunled if procedure
as: trials show that the necessary penetration beyondthe
(a) the depth of weld preparation wherethis is of nominal root can be consistently achieved, by
the J or U type; automatic welding, for example (seefigure 6.2@)).
(b) the depth of weld preparation minus 3 mm or The effective area of a fillet weld is its throat
25 Yó, whichever is the less, where this is of the V or dimension @t> multiplied by its effective length, except
bevel type. that, for fillet welds in holes or slots, the effective area
It is also possible to detemke throat thickness by should not be greaterthan the area of the hole or slot.
procedure trials. If this is done the throat thickness Effective length is defined in 6.9.2.
should not be takenas more than the penetration
consistently achieved, ignoring weld reinforcement. 6.8 Design strength of welded joints
N1 penetration may be assumed in a singlesided butt
--``,``,,``,````````,``````,,,,`-`-`,,`,,`,`,,`---
weld if a backing plate is used. In a teejoint a 6.8.1 General

superimposed fillet weldmay be taken into account. In the design of welded joints consideration shouldbe
6.7.9 Fillet welds given both to the strength of the weld metal andto the
strength of the material in the HAZ adjacent to the
Single-sided fillet welds should not be usedto transmit weld fusion boundary (see 4.4 and figure 6.3). Limiting
moments about their own axes. Intermittent fillet stresses for the material in the HAZ are referred to in
welds may only be used if the distance between the 6.9. The deformation capacityof the joint is improved
ends of aaacent welds, whether in line or staggered on when the factored resistanceof the weld is greater
alternative sides of the part, does not exceed the lesser than that of the agjacent materialin the HAZ.
of the following:
(a) 10 times the thickness of the thinner parent
nmterial or 300 nun, if it is in compression or shew,
(b) 24 times that thickness or 300 mm, if it is in
tension.
\
Root bead
(4 (b)
Figure 6.1 Effective butt weld throats

_ _ _ _ _ _ _ ~~ ~ ~ ~ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ ~ ~
STD.BS1 BS 8118: PART L-ENGL 1991 m 1b2rlbbS 079rl59b 3 7 1

(a) @>
gris the throat length of weld
g, is the leg length of weld
p , is the penetration
Figure 6.2 Effective fillet weld throats
6.8.2 Groups of welds For a butt weld with an oblique tensile load
--``,``,,``,````````,``````,,,,`-`-`,,`,,`,`,,`---
A welded joint consisting of a group of welds should (see figure 6.4) the factored resistance PRBis given by
be designed on the basis of a realistic distribution of the following:
forces amongstthe welds having regardto their pwzete(l+ 2 cos%) -'h
reMve stiffnesses. It is essential that equilibrium with PRB =
Ym
the external factored loads is maintained. where
6.8.3 Limiting stress of weld metal
le is the effectivelength of the weld.
The filler wirefor use in welded construction should
NOTE 1. The effective length of the weld is the total
be chosen in accordance with 2.5.3.2 and table 2.8. weld length when end imperfections are avoided by the
Values of the linuting stress of the weld metalpw( i use of run-on and run-off plates. Otherwise it is the total
N / m z ) for the pernutted conlbinationsof filler and length minus twice the weld width (see figure 6.4);
parent nmterials, shown in table2.8, are shown in te is the effectivethroatthickness of the weld
table 6.2. (see 6.7.8);
Higher values of limitingstress may be needed for 8 is the anglebetween the line of the buttweld
particular filler materials by reference to appendix D. and the line of action of the external load (see
6.8.4 Limiting stress in the HAZ figure 6.4).
Linuting stresses p , and P, for the material in the NOTE 2. The design stress for the weld metal in conlpression nlay
HAZ are given in table 6.3, where P, and pw, are the be taken equal to that in tension, except where buckling can
linuting direct and shear stress respectively. occur.
NOTE 3. Where the parent metal is different in thickness on each
side of the weld, the possibility of a stress concentration effect
6.9 Factored resistance of welds should be investigated.
NOTE 4. Where the weld is subjected to in-plane bending the
6.9.1 Butt weld metal factored resistance per unit length can be found by omitting I , in
A butt weld subjected to shear and axial loading the expression for PRB.
should be proportional such that the following applies: For a joint with no external shear forces and the line
(al2 + 3Q2)ln 5 pw/ynl of the butt weld perpendicular to the line of action of
where the external load, 6 = go", 52 = O and the factored
resistance is as follows:
o is the nornd stress perpendicular to the throat
section under factoredl o w ;
52 is the shear stress acting on the throat section For an externalshear load, parallelto the line of the
parallel to the axis of the weld under factored butt weld, the factored resistanceis as follows:
loading;
pw is the linuting stress for the weld metal
(see 6.8.3);
ynl is the nmterial factor for the weld metal
(see table 3.3).

88
Provided by IHS under license with BSI - Uncontrolled Copy Licensee=Rolls Royce Enterprise Wide/5973912035, User=Wootton, John O BSI 07-19W
STD-BSI BS 8118: PART 1-ENGL 1991 1b29bb9
079q597208
I Table 6.2 Limiting stresses of weld metal P,

Parent metal
I Non-heat-treatable
alloys alloys I Heat-treatable I
1200 6464A 6464 6261 3103 6061 60637 0 2 06083
~~
3106 6082
N/m2 N/m2 N/nun2 N/nun2
N / m 2N/nun2N/nuu2 N/nm2 N/nu$
55 190 150 245
255 210 190 200
NOTE.When using dissimilar parent metals the lower of the two limiting stresses for the weld metal should be taken. When welds are
made on parent metals not included in table 6.2 or appendix D the value of the limiting stress for the weld metal should be obtained
experimentally.
a b l e 6.3 Limiting stresses P, and pvzin the HAZ

I
Non-heat-treatable alloys (see note 1) Heat-treatable alloys
Parent alloy PaZ Pvz Parent alloy Condition P, Pvz
supplied
N h 2 N/nun2 N/nun2 N/nd
1200 25 15 6061 T6 145 85
3103 35 20 GO63 T4 85 50
3015 40 25 T5 95 55
5083 150 90 TG 95 55
5154A 100 60 6082 T4 140 85
5251 70 40 TG 150 90
5454 95 55 7020 T4 170(A) 100
T4 210(B) 125
--``,``,,``,````````,``````,,,,`-`-`,,`,,`,`,,`---
TG 180(A) 110
TG 240(B) 145
(see note 2)
NOTE 1. All conditions are supplied (see table 4.5).
NOTE 2. For 7020 material refer to 4.4.2.2.for the annlicabilitv of the A and B values. I
6.9.2 Fillet weld metal For a simple longitudinal fillet weld (load applied
A fillet weld should be proportioned suchthat the parallel to the length of the weld) 01 = r1 = O and the
following expressionis satisfied factored resistance depends only on r2 as follows:
(al2+ 3 ( q 2 + q 2 ) ” S 0.85pw/ym 0.85-PdffJt
where pRF = 3%ym
P , 01, 72 and ym are as defined in 6.9.1; where If is the effective length of the fillet weld. The
value of l f is influenced by the total length of the weld,
r1 is the shear stress acting on the throat section as indicated in figure 6.6, which provides a guide to
perpendicular to the axis of the weld. the variation of If with L, where L is the total weld
The relationship between 01, r1 and r2 is governed by length. Figure 6.6 is based on the results of a small
the direction of the external loading action,S, at the number of tests.
weld (see figure 6.5). When the stress distribution along the weld
For a simple transversefiiet weld (load applied corresponds to that in the adjacent parent materialas,
perpendicular to the length of the weld) 01 = rl, for example, in the case of a weld connecting the
r2 = O and the factored resistance is as follows: flange and web of a plate girder, the effective lengthis
as for butt welds.If the weld is subjected to in-plane
bending the factored resistance per unit length can be
found by onuttingle, or If in the expression forPKF.
where le is the effective length of the weld (asfor butt
welds).

O BSI 07-1999
T
a) In-line butt @) Fillet welded lap
T T T T
2) Tee butt (d) Tee fillet
P
pa "L Ii
I
l
I I I I
T T T T
:) Tee butt and tee fillet
Key (see figures 6.1 and 6.2)
W: weld metal (see 6.9.1 and 6.9.2)
F heat-affected zone (fusion boundary)
T: heat-affected zone ( t oe)
for fillets the width of the zone is t
"" is the failure plane
J
I- butts: plane is equal to the plate thickness
fillets: plane width is the width of the leg
length of the weld
The shaded area is the heat affected zone
) Potential failure lines shown on a plan view at the joint end
'igure6.3 Failure planes for static welded joint checks
--``,``,,``,````````,``````,,,,`-`-`,,`,,`,`,,`---
90
O BSI 07-1990
S
E x terna1 loading action
in plane o f plates
Figure 6.4 Butt weld design
TZ action loading External
--``,``,,``,````````,``````,,,,`-`-`,,`,,`,`,,`---
Weld throat
Effet t i v
cross-sectional
ar ea
Figure 6.5 Fillet weld design

O BSI 07-1999
91
1. o (b) Shear forcein failure plane:
(1) butts:
VRFB= pvzLt
-(at the fusion boundary)
Ym
-
f'
L
vRTB = P
where
Ym
atthe toe, see figure 6.3)
S(
VRFB are the factored shear

andresistances of a HAZ adjacent
VRTB to a butt weld.
0.5
o 10 50 (2) fillets:
-
L
9, VRFF= (atthe fusion
boundary)
NOTE. This figure only applies if Wgt < 50. Ym
PVZLt
Figure 6.6 Effective length of VRTF = -
Ym
longitudinal fillet welds
(
atthe toe, see figure 6.3 and 6.9.3(d))
where
6.9.3 Heat-affected zones ( W S )
VRFF are the factored shear
The factored resistanceof a HAZ adjacent to a weld
andresistances of a HAZ adjacent
--``,``,,``,````````,``````,,,,`-`-`,,`,,`,`,,`---
(see figures6.1, 6.2 and 6.3) is given by the following.

VRTF to a filletweld.
(a) Direct tensile force normalto the failure plane
(see figure 6.3): (c) When there is a combined shear and direct force
(1) butts: on the H A Z , these forces should be linutedin
accordance with the following equation:
PRFB= (at the fusion
boundary) (~!&/pRz)~i- (SflRZ)' 5 1
Ym
where
PRTB
= ym (atthe toe, see figure 6.3)
S, and S b are the extemal loading actions
where under factored loading onthe HAZ
in the direct loading and shear;
~RFB are the factoreddirect
andresistances of a HAZ a a c e n t PRZand VRZ are the factored resistances of the
HAZ in direct loading and shear.
~ R T B to a butt weld
P, is the limiting direct stress in the HAZ; (d) When checking the factored resistanceof a fillet
L is the total weld
length. weld at its toe, note that for thicker sectionsthe
(2) fillets HAZ does not extendthe full thickness and a
snlituer valueof t should be taken (see figure4.6(i)
h F F*= P (atthe fusion boundary) and 4.4.3.1).
(e) Where the failure planeis subjected to in-plane
I'RTF (
atthe toe, see figure 6.3 bending, the factored resistance canbe expressed in
ternu of resistance per unit length by onuttingL
and 6.9.3(d)) from the above equations.
where (0 Where the failure planeis subjected to in-plane
bending and shear, the factored resistanceper unit
pRm are the factoreddirect length should be reduced to allow for the combined
and resistances of a HAZ ascent effects of shear and direct stress (see 6.9.3(c)).
PRTF to a filletweld.

~ 92
Licensee=Rolls Royce Enterprise Wide/5973912035, User=Wootton, John O
BSI 07-1999
6.10 Bonded joints establish the mean and standard deviationof the failing
loads. The factored resistance of a bonded joint, PRG,
6.10.1 General is then given by
Structuraljoints in aluminium may be made by PRG= (R, - 2SdYnv
bonding with adhesive. Bonding needs an expert where
technique and should be used with great care
(see BS 8118 : Part 2). R, is the mean of the failingloads;
Bonded joints are suitable for carryingshear loads, but
should not be used in tension or where the loadiig sd is the standarddeviation of the failingloads;
causes peehg or other forces tending to open the ym is the nlaterialfactorforbonded joints (see
joint. table 3.3) and is equal to 3.0.
Loads should be carried over as large an area as
possible. Increasing the width of joints usually The ym factor should be increased in relationto the
increases the strength pro rata Increasing the length is loss of performance of adhesive at extremes of
beneficial only for veryshort overlaps. operating temperature and environment.
The performance of large bondedjoints can be 6.10.3 Tests
improved by reducing peel and cleavage stresses, and Manufacturer's test data may be used as the most
reducing stress concentrations at the end of laps. It is optimistic values for initial design. Thesedata are
helpful to taper off the ends of laps and introduce generally given for thick adherendshear test samples
conlpensation pieces. as shown in figure 6.7. When only mean strengths are
Bonded joints need to be supported after assembly for quoted, s d should be taken as O.LR,, (see appendix B).
the period necessary to allow the optimum bond
--``,``,,``,````````,``````,,,,`-`-`,,`,,`,`,,`---
strength of the adhesive to be developed. Entrained air

pockets shouldbe avoided.
Many different adhesivesare available each, generally,
being suitable fora specified range of applications and
service conditions only. The suitabilityof the adhesive
in all resIjects for useon, and for the life of, a
particular structure, should be demonstmtedto the
satisfaction of the designer, who should obtain
specialist advice at all stages of the design and
construction.
A specified jointing system, comprising preparation of
the adherend surfaces,the adhesive, bondmg and
curing processes, should be strictly followed as
variation of any step can severely affectthe
performance of the joint.
6.10.2 Factored resistance
The factored resistanceof a bonded joint is influenced
by the following factors:
(a) the surface preparation procedures before
bonding;
(b) the direction of stresses in the joint; All dimensions are in
(c) the size and shapeof the components to be millimetres.
joined; Figure 6.7 Thick
(d) the thickness of the glue line; adhered shear test
(e) the assenlbly and curing procedures;
(0 the service tenpxahre and environment; Thin sheet lap tests (see BS 5350 : Part C5) may be
(g) design life. used for conlparative purposes, durability studies,
Unless validated test data äre available the strength of surface treatment assessment, curing conditions, etc.
the joint should be establishedby testing. Generally, Strength valueswill be low due to the tendency of this
sanlple joints should be made at full scale, using the joint to peel and will be conservative if used for
sanle manufacturing procedureas for production structural design calculations (see figure 6.8).
joints. These should be tested with sinular joint
construction and loadingto that occurring in the actual
structure. A minin~un~ of five tests should be made to
~

O BSI 07-1999
93
STD-BSI BS 8118: PART 1-ENGL 1991 D Lb2qbb9 079qb02 4T5 I
O I O
--``,``,,``,````````,``````,,,,`-`-`,,`,,`,`,,`---
I
(a) single overlap joint @) double overlap joint
82.53
(c) position of pin hole in joint specimens

All dimensions are in millinletres
Figure 6.8 Thin sheet test specimens
94
O BSI 07-1999
STD-BSI BS 8118: PART 1-ENGL 1991 m LbZ'ibb9 079qb03 331 D
Section 7.Fatigue
7.1 Introduction 7.1.4 Potential sites for fatigue cracking

7.1.1 General Most common initiation sites for fatigue cracks are as
follows:
This section contains ternw specificto fatigue
assessment which are defined in 1.2. The data given in (a) toes and roots of fusion welds;
this section applies to elements formed from (b) machined comers and drilled holes;
extrusions, plates,sheet and strip. The data should not (c) surfaces under high contact pressure (fretting);
be used for castingsor forgings. Designers wishingto (d) roots of fastener threads.
employ castingsor forgings under fatigue conditions
should consultthe nmufacturers. 7.1.5 Conditions for fatigue susceptibility
This section gives recommendations for assessment by The n& conditions affecting fatigueperfornmce are
calculation alone. Thedata provided may not be as follows:
adequate for all applications. In this case additional (a) High ratio of dyzumic to static load. Moving or
data may be obtained from test. Guidance onthis is structures, suchas land or sea transport
given in section 8. Test data obtained in accordance vehicles, cranes, etc.are more likely to be prone to
with section8 may be used as a substitute forthe fatigue problenlsthan fured structures, unless the
design data given in section 7. latter are predonlinantly carrying movingloads, as in
7.1.2 Influence of fatigue on design the case of bridges.
Structures subjectedto fluctuating service loadsmay (b) FFI.equent applications of load. This results in a
be liable to fail by fatigue. The degree of compliance high nunlber of cycles inthe design life. Slender
with the static limit state criteria given in sections 3 structures or members with lownatural frequencies
and 4 nmy not selve as any useful guideto the risk of are particularly prone to resonance and hence
fatigue failure. magrufication of dynanuc stress, even though the
static design stresses are low. Structures subjected
It is necessary to establish as early as possible the predonmtly to fluid loading, such as wind and
extent to which fatigue is likely to control the design. structures supporthg nlachinery, should be carefully
In doing this the following factors are important. checked for resonant effects.
(a) An accurate prediction of the full complete (c) Use of welding. Some commonly used welded
service loading sequence throughout the design life details have low fatigue strength.This applies not
should be available. only to joints between members, butalso to any
@) The elastic response of the structure under these attachment to a loaded member, whetheror not the
loads should be accurately assessed. resulting connectionis considered to be 'structural'.
(c) Detail design, methods of manufacture and (d) Complexit3 ofjoint d e t a i l . Complex joints
degree of quality control can havea major influence frequently result in high stress concentrations due to
on fatigue strength, and should be defined more local variationsin stiffness of the load path. Whilst
precisely than for statically controlled members.This these may have little effecton the ultimate static
can have a sigrufcant influenceon design and capacity of the joint they can havea severe effect on
construction cost. fatigue resistance. If fatigue is don-t the member
cross-sectional shape should be selected to ensure
7.1.3 Mechanism of failure smoothness and simplicityof joint design, so that
Fatigue failure usually initiatesat a point of high stress stresses can be calculated and adequate standards of
concentration, particularlyif sharp crack-like fabrication and inspection can be assured.
discontinuities exist there. Fatigue cracks will extend
(e) Enwimment. In certain thermal and chemical
incrementally underthe action of cyclic stress change.
They normally remain stable under constant load. environments fatigue strength may be reduced.
Ultimate failure occurs whenthe remaining
cross-section is insufficient to carry the peak tensile 7.2 Fatigue design criteria
load applied throughout.
7.2.1 Design philosophy
Fatigue cracks propagate approximatelyat right angles
to the direction of rnaximum principal stress range. It is reconunended that, wherever possible, aluminium
The rate of propagation is proportional to at least the structures are designed on the basis of providing a safe
third power of the product of the stress range and the life. The assessment methodin this section is designed
square root of the total crack length. Forthis reason to ensure that the probability of failure by fatigue
crack growth is slow in the early stages, and fatigue during the structure's life is comparable with that for
cracks tend to be inconspicuous for the major partof other ultimate h u t state modes of failure.
their life. This may give rise to problems of detection
in senice.
--``,``,,``,````````,``````,,,,`-`-`,,`,,`,`,,`---

O BSI 07-1999
95
There may be circumstances wherethe severity of endurance (NI,etc.) from 7.8.1. Where it has been
loading, degree of reduhdancy andthe ease of decided to use a value of yn,f other than unity, this
inspection and repairare such that a fail safe or should be taken into accountin setting the values of
damage tolerant approachmay be justified in the design stress ranges (see 3.6.2).
economic terms. In this case the safety margins nmy (f) Sum the total danwe for all cycles using Miner’s
be reduced from those required fora safe life design. summation:
Guidance on this is given in section 3. factored design life
The estimated life =
7.2.2 Fatigue failure criterion vn
The basis of fatigue design used hereis that the -&N
required life will be achieved provided that
frmN 5 K2
If :x exceeds unity either the stress ranges should
where be reduced at that point or the detal should be
changed to a higher class (see 7.7).
N is the predictednumber ofcycles to failure
of a stress range fr; 7.4 Fatigue loading
K2 is a constantdependmgon the class of All sources of fluctuating stress in the structure should
detail, and ensuresa high probability of be identified. Thesenmy arise as a result of the
survival (see 7.8.1); following:
fr is the principal stress rangeat the detailand (a) superimposed moving loads, including vibrations
is constant for all cycles; from machinery in stationary structures;
m is the inverseslope of the& - N curvesand @) environmental loadssuch as wind, waves, etc.;
is a constant for most detail classes. (c) acceleration forces in moving structures;
For most practical purposes structural details do not (d) temperature changes.
experience constant amplitude stress histories. The Loading for fatigue is normally described in tem- of
treatment for general loadingis given in 7.3. a design load spectrum, which definesa range of
The method of deriving the appropriate stress range@) intensities of a specific live load event and the
fr is given in 7.4 and 7.6. Classifications for more number of times that each intensity levelis applied
conmonly used detail types are given in 7.7. Values of during the structure’s design life.If two or more
K2 and m are given in 7.8. independent live load events are likely to occur then
it will be necessary to specify the phasing between
Provided that the fatigue strengthdata in 7.8, and the them.
loading, complies with 7.4, then the overall load factor
yf should be takento be unity. Guidance on loading specificallyfor fatigue
assessment may be obtained fromBS 2573 (cranes),
BS 5400 : Part 10 Wghway and railway bridges) and
7.3 Fatigue assessment procedure BS 8100 (lattice towers).
A structural member may containa number of Reahtic assessment of the fatigue loading is crucial
potential fatigue crack initiafion sites. Regions of the to the calculation of the life of the structure. Where
structure containingthe highest stress fluctuations no published data for live loading exist,resort may
and/or the severest stress concentrations would have to be n ~ to eobtaining data from existing
nomdly be checked first. The basic procedure is as structures subjectedto sinular effects. By recording
follows (see figure 7.1). continuous strain or deflection measurenlents overa
(a) Obtain an upper bound estimateof the service suitable sanlplig period, loading data nmy be
loadmg sequence forthe structure’s design life (see inferred by subsequent analysis of the ,response.
7.4 and appendix C). Particular care should be takento assess dynanuc
@) Estinlate the resulting stress history at the detail
nmgnifkation effects where loading frequenciesare
being checked (see 7.5). close to one of the natural frequenciesof the
structure. Further guidance is given in 8.4.2.
(c) Reduce the stress hist~ryto an equivalent
number of cycles (TZ)of different stress rangesf, The design load spectrum should be selectedon the
using a cycle counting technique(see 7.6.1). basis that it is an upper bound estimate of the
accumulated service conditions overthe full design
(d) Rank the cycles in descending order of life of the structure. Account should be takenof all
an@ittlde,frl,fa ... to form a spectrum stre= likely operational and environmental effects arising
(see 7.6.2). from the foreseeable usage of the structure during
(e) Classify the detail in accordance with tables 7.1 that period. The confidence linut on the design load
to 7.3, and 7.7. For the appropriate classifcationand
design stress range (&I, etc.), find the pem-ible
spectrum should be based on mean plus 2 standard
deviation linuts on both amplitude and frequency.
I
--``,``,,``,````````,``````,,,,`-`-`,,`,,`,`,,`---

96
:
Typical load cycle [repeated n times
Loadindesignlife I
5 Time
-!J"y
PA Detail X-X pe t Time
(a) Loading sequence
@) Stress history at X-X
\
\
\
'"
'""
(reservoir method I
(c) Cycle counting
.. I
1I 1
--``,``,,``,````````,``````,,,,`-`-`,,`,,`,`,,`---
I c 2
I fr3 fr,
Total cycles i n
factored Life
(d) Stress spectrum
fr
(f) Damage summation

(Palmagren-Miner rule)
fr 1
fr2
fr 3
fr I
N, N2 N, N, Cycles
(e) C,ycles to failure
Figure 7.1 Fatigue assessment procedure
O
Copyright British Standards Institution ES1 07-1999 97
7.5 Stresses (5) shear lag, distortion and warping in wide
plated or hollow menlbem;
7.5.1 Derivation of stresses (6) non-linear out-of-plane bending effects in
Where the stress response is to be calculated from slender componentssuch as flat plates wherethe
specified load events, elastic theory should be usedto static stress is close to the elastic critical stress,
model the structure. Section properties should not be e.g. tension field in webs.
reduced for HAZ or local buckling effects, butsee The presence of residual stresses may be ignored for
7.5.2(a)(4). Modelling of the elastic stiftñessesof welded joints as these are already included in the
nlenlbers and joints should be accurate and should fr - N data. In mechanical joints, provided any
include the effects of any permanent non-structural tensile residual stresses are allowed for,that part of
material which may mod@ the stiffness. No plastic the stress range which is in overall compressionnny
redtstribution of stresses should be allowed. be reduced by 40 %.
Where stress response data are to be obtained from
strain measurements ona sinular structure, care
m) FiUet and partid p m t m t i o n butt welds. Cracks
initiating from weldroots and propagating through
should be taken in siting strain transducers to ensure the weld throat should be assessed usingthe vector
that the correct stress paranleter is being measured sum of the shear stresses in the weld metal basedon
(see 7.5.2). Further guidance on the measurement of an effective throat dimension (see figure7.3).
strain data is given in 8.4.
In lapped joints in one planethe stress per unit
7.5.2 Stress parameters length of weld may be calculated onthe basis of the
The stresses to be used in the fatigue assessment average area for axial forcesand an elastic polar
procedures in 7.3 depend on the crack initiation site modulus of the weld group for in-plane moments
and propagation path, as follows. (see figure 7.4).
(a) Parent materid a n d f u u penetration butt welds. In tee-joints any effect of different axial stiffness
Cracks initiating from weldtoes, fastener holes, along the joint should be taken into account.
faying surfaces, etc. and propagating through parent Where single filletsor incompletely penetmted butt
material or fully penetrated weld metal should be welds are subjected to out-of-plane bending
assessed using the nominal principalstress range in moments the stresses at the root should be
the member at that point. calculated using a linear stress distribution through
The local stress concentration effectsof weld profde, the throat (see figure 7.5).
bolt and rivet holes, etc. shouldbe ignored as these No allowance should berime for bearing contact
are taken into accountin the& - N strength data for on the root face in partially penetrated welded
the appropriate detail class.They do not therefore joints.
need to be calculated (see tables 7.1to 7.3). If (c) Threaded fasteners under axid load. Cracks
detailed finte element modelsof joints are initiating at thread roots should be assessed using
calculated the mesh should notbe so fine that local the mean axial stress on the core area of the thread.
stresses are used (see also 8.4.4.1).
Where bending is also present the peak stress should
Other larger geometrical effects which may give rise be used, calculated onthe elastic modulus of the
to the non-linear stress distributions in certain core.
circumstances should be taken into account (see
figure 7.2). Examples of these are as follows:
(1) gross changes in crosssection shape, e.g. at
7.6 Derivation of stress spectra
cut-outs; 7.6.1 Cycle counting
(2) gross changes in crosssection stifmess, e.g. at Cycle countingis a procedure for breaking down a
angled junctions betweenthin wall members; complex stress history into a convenient spectrum of
(3) changes in direction or alignment beyond cycles in terms of amplitudef, and frequencyn (see
those pernutted in tables 7.1 to 7.3; figure 7.1). There are various methods inuse. For short
(4) secondary bendingstresses arising from joint stress histories where simpleloadmg events are
fMty in lattice structures; repeated a number of times, the reservoir method is
reconunended. It is easy to visualize and simpleto use
(see figure 7.6). Where long stress histories haveto be
used, such as those obtained from measuredstrains in
actual structures (see 8.4) the &-flow method is
reconunended. Both methodsare suitable for computer
analysis.
--``,``,,``,````````,``````,,,,`-`-`,,`,,`,`,,`---

98
Section 7 Bs 8118 : part 1 : 1991
"
fmm
Away all structural conne&om or parts At a lapped or spliced connection
fastened with:
On a member
At
of any external or internal edge At a small hole (may Friction grip bolts Rivets Bearing bolts
constant or smoothly contain bolt for minor
varying cross-section m-)
heMioImlmq" No holes or Any apertUre or reemant comer z6 Hole diameter r3t
-
-Tpenhmnt
"" "-
rornem - ."- I I I
All surfaces rolled, extruded or machined to Surfaces machined or Holes drilled or removed
a smooth finish in direction of fr @undindirection lbrqued to proof load Cold driven Nuts secured
off, of bolt mechanically or by
"M Net cross-sectional area

"" Use stress concentmtion factor for apertures
or reentrant comem
bnn=Lmr 1.1 1.2 11.3 1.4 1.5 1.6 1.7
-panriMdelu 80 Bo 160 3s 29 29 17
--``,``,,``,````````,``````,,,,`-`-`,,`,,`,`,,`---

i
--``,``,,``,````````,``````,,,,`-`-`,,`,,`,`,,`---

STD-BSI BS BLLB: P A R T L-ENGL 1991 l b 2 9 b b 9 0794b08 913 D

--``,``,,``,````````,``````,,,,`-`-`,,`,,`,`,,`---

--``,``,,``,````````,``````,,,,`-`-`,,`,,`,`,,`---
-
-Design stress range fr = -
P + M
A T
P - M c ] M -P
Linear stress distribution

Crack initiation site assumed.
Weld toe stress concentration
factor not calculated
(a) Local stress concentrator
Meannet stress, C
I-LZI attachment
Non-linear stress
distribution
Design stress at-

initiation site,)(
Large aperture or
re -entrant corner
--
-
@) Large stress concentrator (large opening)
Figure 7.2 Stress parameter for parent material
A
P, and H, a r e forces per unit length
Vector stress
4 4
H,l29,
Figure 7.3 Stresses in weld throats

105
9 Lapped a r e a
--``,``,,``,````````,``````,,,,`-`-`,,`,,`,`,,`---
Stressdistribution Stress distribution
due to direct load P due to moment M
NOTE. Maximum shear flux along welds = M a I o
where
Io is polar second moment of area about centroid of weld
group;
d is the maximum distance of a point in the weld group from
the centroid
Figure 7.4 Stress in lapped joints
M 7.7 Classification of details

n The fatigue strengthof a detail is always dependent on
the following factors:
(a) the direction of the fluctuating stress relative to
the detail;
@) the location of the initiating crack in the detal;
(c) the geonletrical arrangement and relative
proportion of the detail.
It may also depend on the following:
(1) the product fornl;
Figure 7.5 Stresses in root of (2) the nlaterial (unless welded);
fillet (3) the method of fabrication;
(4) the degree of inspection after fabrication.
Tables 7.1 to 7.3 show the classifications for more
7.6.2 Derivation of stress spectrum commonly used details. For convenience they have
The listing of cycles in descending order of amplitude been divided into three basic groups, namely:
fr results in a stress spectrum. For ease of calculation
(i) type 1, non-welded details, see table 7.1;
it may be required to simplify the spectrum into fewer
bands. A conservative methodis to group bands (ii)type 2, welded details on surface of loaded
together into larger groups containingthe same total member, see table 7.2;
number of cycles, but whose amplitudeis equal to that (iii) type 3, welded details at end connections,see
of the highest band in the group. More accurately, the table 7.3.
weighted average of all the bands in one group can be The tables are used by identlfylngthe detail in the
calculated usingthe power m, where m is the inverse figure closest to the one in the structure being
slope of the& - N curve most likelyto be used (see assessed. The classes forthe particular crack initiation
figure 7.7). The use of an arithmetic mean value w l
i sites associated with thatare then checked in the
always be unconservative. relevant table. In sonle cases particular nwufacturing
or inspection operations nlaybe needed which are
outside those required in BS 8118 : Part 2.

106
-
B I
Step 1. Determine stress history for

loading event. Identify peak (B)
-L7 -
V
A
Time
Step 2. Move stress history on left of

peak to right
step 3. Fill resulting ‘reservoir’ with

‘water’. Greatest. dept,h is major
cycle
Step 4. Drain at greatest depth. Find

new maximum depth. This is second
largest cycle
Step 5 onwards. Repeat until all

‘water’ drained. Sum of all cycles is
stress spectrum for above history
I I I Cycles
Figure 7.6 Reservoir cycle counting method
--``,``,,``,````````,``````,,,,`-`-`,,`,,`,`,,`---

O BSI 07-1999
~~
STD*BSI BS 81LB: PART L-ENGL 1991 D lb2'4bb9 0794bL2 3'44 M

r
r1 "_- lo-Peak(conservative)
.""_
Recorded spectrum m = Inverse slope o f
thelog f , l l o g N
curve spectrumSimplified
(see 7.2.2 and
figure 7.8 or 7.9 1
I I I .
Original-,
bands
Simplified L I ' H
i-q
ba n-d I l i II I 1 I
"1 "2 "3%
Cumulativefrequency n
Figure 7.7 Simplified stress spectrum
L
7.8 Fatigue strength data Any stress cycles below the variable amplitude cut-off
stressfov, which occurs at 10s cycles, are assumed to
7.8.1 Classified details be nondamaghg.
The generalized formof the& - N relationship is It should be noted that the use of the V(m + 2) slope
shown in figure 7.8, plotted on logarithmic scales. The may be conservativefor some spectra. Where a design
design curve represents meanminus 2 standard is critically dependent onthis region and where
deviation level belowthe mean line through nlitximum economy is sought it may be appropriate to
experimental data. consider using component testing (see8.4.4.1) or
The constant amplitude cut-off stress,&, occurs at applying fracture mechanics analysis. The values of K2
lo7 cycles, below which constant amplitudestress and m are given in table 7.4 for each detail class.
cycles are assumed to be nondartuging. However, Designf, - N curves are given in figure 7.9.
even if occasional cycles occur abovethis level, they
will cause propagation which,as the crack extends,
will cause lower amplitude cyclesto beconle
r'Igble 7.4 Values of K2 and m in figure 7.9
Detail m, foc fov
damgmg. For this reason the slope of the& - N class
m e s ( s e e figure 7.8) is changed to l/(m + 2) between N/mm2 Nhm2
5 x 106 and 108 cycles for general spectrum loading
conditions. 60 4.5 2.01 X 1014 42.0 30.9
NOTE. fr applies to all types of stress range, including fluctuating 50 4 1.25 X 1013 33.4 24.1
compressive stresses.
42 3.5 9.60 x 10" 26.5 18.7
35 3.25 2.09 x 10" 21.3 14.9
29 3 4.88 x 1010 17.0 11.7
24 3 2.76 X 1O'O 14.0 9.7
20 3 1.60 x 10'0 11.7 8.1
17 3 9.83 x 109 9.9 6.9
14 3 5.49 x 109 8.2 5.7
--``,``,,``,````````,``````,,,,`-`-`,,`,,`,`,,`---

108
Provided by IHS under license with BSI - Uncontrolled Copy O
Licensee=Rolls Royce Enterprise Wide/5973912035, User=Wootton, John BSI 07-1999
~ .~~
STD-BSI BS 8118: PART 1-ENGL 1991 1b24bb7 0 7 7 4 b L 3 200

7.8.2 Unclassified details 7.8.5 Workmanship

Details not fully covered by tables 7.1to 7.3 should be The maximum pernutted class for classified details in
assessed by reference to published data where tables 7.1 to 7.3 represents the maximum fatigue
available. Alternatively fatigue acceptancetests may be strength pernuttedby this code forthe detail in
carried out in accordance with 8.4.4.1. question without further substantiationby test (see
Guidance on the derivation off, - N data, and on section 8). Where the fatigue stressingat a classified
conditions where higher strengths might be expected, detail is significantly belowthat pernutied the required
is given in appendix L. class w libe less than the maximum pernutted class.
This will always occur when high class details itre
7.8.3 Low endurance range located close to low class details where bothare
In the e n d m c e range between 10-3and 1@a check experiencing similar stress fluctuations.
should be made that the design stress range from The higher class details often require additional
figure 7.9 does not resultin a maximum tensile stress inspection and denmd higher worknxinshipstandards
that exceeds the static design stress for the detail. This (see 3.9.9.3 and appendixB of BS 8118 : Part 2 : 1991).
possibility is indicated by a note on figure7.9. It is important to the economy of manufacture that
7.8.4 Improvement techniques inspection and workmsurshipstandards are not
dictated by the nlaxinlum pernutted classof every
The fatigue strengthof certain detailtypes shown in detail, but by the required class. The required class at a
tables 7.1 to 7.3 may be improved by the application of detail is obtained by determining the lowestf, - N
special manufacturing techniques. Theseare generally curve fromfigure 7.9 where Miner’s sumnmtion is less
expensive to apply and present quality control than unity (see 7.3(f)). Where stress fluctuations occur
difficulties. They should not be relied upon for general in more than one directionat a detail different class
design purposes, unless fatigue is particularly criticalto requirements may be found for each directionh order
the overall economy of the structure, in which case that inspection can be particularly concentrated on
specialist advice shouldbe sought. They are more those parts of the structure which are critical for
commonly used to overconle existing design fatigue the following actions should be taken.
deficiencies.
(a) Determine by calculationthose regions of the
The following techniques have been used on structure where the class requirement exceeds
au
lnmum alloys and are most effective for high cycle class 20.
applications.
@) Indicate on the detailed drawings at all detailsin
(a) Introduction of compressive residualstresses at these regions the required class and the direction of
the location of crack initiation. This may be carried stress fluctuation as shown in figure 7.10.
out at transverse weld toes by peening. At bolt holes
the cold expansion methodmay be used. (c) Any drawing which contains a detail with a
required fatigue class greaterthan 20 should have
(b) Reduction of stress concentration effect at the the following general note added
location of crack initiation. This may be carried out
by grinding transverse weldtoes to a smooth profile. ‘Details requiring quality above normalare indicated
with a Fat number and an arrow(see appendix B of
BS 8118 : Part 2 : 1991).’
--``,``,,``,````````,``````,,,,`-`-`,,`,,`,`,,`---

O BSI 07-1999
~~ ~~ ~ ~~
STD-BSI BS BLLB: PART II-ENGL 3 7 9 1 W IIb2qbb7 07711bL4 L17 m

+ratter in test data

-
-o
O
U
VI
\
m *
-
O
-IReference strength
I
r'
al
cn
C r
O CI C
L -----.
VI
VI
al
L
c ov
VI
- 6
lo4 zX10 sX1o6 10' 10
Endurance N (cycles 1 1 log scale 1
NOTE.
foc is the constant amplitude cut-off stress;

fov is the variable amplitude cut-off stress.
Figure 7.8 '1[srpicalf, - N relationship
--``,``,,``,````````,``````,,,,`-`-`,,`,,`,`,,`---

110
O BSI 07-1999
STD-BSI BS 8118: PART L-ENGL 1771 W L b 2 4 b b 9 077qbL5 053 II
H
W
d
U
h
U
-a
0,
X
N
c
Q
N
E
E
z
._
c
c
c
m
c
E
c
m
al
W
c
W
c
al
'c
W
c
II
m
H
-Q
--``,``,,``,````````,``````,,,,`-`-`,,`,,`,`,,`---
U
O BSI 07-1999
Copyright British Standards Institution 111
1- Fat 29
I
Fat 24 Fat 24 View X - X
X
Figure 7.10 Method of identification of required fatigue class on
drawings
--``,``,,``,````````,``````,,,,`-`-`,,`,,`,`,,`---

Section 8. Testing
8.1 General Where the tests are to be applied to a sinlulation of the

actual structure or to a component the sample should
A structure or structural conlponent designedin
accordance with sections 2 to 7 of this code need not be mounted in such a way that it will experience the
be verified by testing but nlay beso verified at the normal restmints to the effects of the conlbination of
nmufacturer’s discretion. Such testing nlay be under applied loads.
static loading (see 8.3), fatigue loading (see 8.4), or In the circunutances where the combination of applied
both. loads, their directions,and orientation of the sample
Verification by testing is appropriate wherethe can produce permutationsof the resistance of the
--``,``,,``,````````,``````,,,,`-`-`,,`,,`,`,,`---
following occur sample, that combination whichis expected to give the
lowest resistance should be used.
(a) the structure or component is not amenable to
verifcation by analysis or such a procedure is
deemed to be impracticable; 8.3 Static tests
@) materials or design procedures otherthan those 8.3.1 General
referred to in sections 2 to 7 were used; Static tests are intended to show whether the structure
(c) there is doubt or dmgreement about the validity or conlponent can carrythe unfactored loads (known
of the design method,the quality of nmterial or the as the nominal loads, see 3.2.2) without exceeding the
quality of the workmanship. serviceability limitstate, and also whether it can cany
The nlethod and extentof testing shouldbe agreed the factored loads(see 3.2.3) without exceeding the
between the designer (supplier), andthe engineer ultimate limit state. It is sonletinles appropriateto
responsible for acceptance (purchaser).The methodof cany out an ultinmte mistance test (see 8.3.5).
testing should be consistent with the service conditions 8.3.2 Application of loads
for the structure or component and may comprise a
statically or dynanucally loaded resistance test and/or a Loading should be by means of dead weights, force
fatigue resistancetest. Tests should be conducted at a generating devices,or Wlacement generating devices.
competent facility acceptableto both supplier and The method should include force nleasuring devices of
purchaser. known accuracy,
The number of samples to be tested should be agreed Prior to the application of each combination of
between purchaser and supplier having regard to the nominal loads the sample nmy be loaded and unloaded
numbers of components to be nmnufactured. Where once. The loadingto be applied for this optional
the number of samples to be tested is to be large a ‘settling down’ cycle should not exceedthe nonlinal
sufficient numberof samples should be testedto loads or such other lower level of loading relatingto a
pernut statistical analysisof the mean resistance and limiting deformation criterionfor acceptance. The
standard deviation for each conditionof loading. loading should be nxtintainedfor at least 15 min. It is
recommended that displacements be measured during
Where acceptance of the design depends upon the settling down cycle. Reloading should not occur
verifcation by testing the purchaser or his agent within 15 min of removal of the settlung load.
should be afforded the facility of witnessing every test. Anchorages should be checkedfor tightness before
Where verification of the design depends upon testing proceeding with the main test.
a report should be issued describing in detail (or by Loading up to the nominal loads should proceed infive
reference to the appropriate British Standard)the approximately equal increments. Each increnlent
method of testing andgiving all the measured should be maintained whilst deflection and/orstrain
resistances in the form of a type test certificate readings are obtained and the sample is examined for
containing at least the information listed in 8.5. signs of distress. At the fiRh increment (serviceability
h u t ) the deflection(s) andor strajns should be
8.2 Preparation for test recorded imnlediakly after application of the load(s)
and again afterthis load level has been maintained for
The sample to be tested, if not the actual structure or 15 min.
component to be destined for service, should represent
as accurately as possible the design in t e r m of The nominal loads should be removed and the
material properties, dimensions, methods of jointing, structure inspected before the application of factored
and finishes wherethe latter may be sensitive to the loads. Loading should thenbe applied incrementally up
effects of strain. to the factored load (sometiriles referred to as the
The test sample should beset up in a normal attitude ’proof load), recordhg deflections and behaviour as
before. The increase from nominalto factored load
so that the dead loads due to self-weight are operating should be made in at least five increments. The
normally. Where this is not possible the effectsof dead factored load should be maintainedfor 15 nin during
load may be represented by equivalent imposed loads.
which tinle the deflection(s) should be monitored and
the sanlple examined for signsof distress.

In this condition the consequence for personnelof a 8.4 Acceptance testing for fatigue
sudden failure shouldbe taken into account and
suitable precautions taken. 8.4.1 Objectives of test
The factored loading should be removed after 15 nun Where there are insufficient data for verification of a
and the residual deflection recorded after a design by calculation alone in accordance with
further 15 nin. section 7, supplenlentary evidencenmy be provided by
Deflection shouldbe measured by instruments or a specific testing progranune. Testdata nmy be
recorded autonmtically by systenw of known accuracy. required for one or more of the following additional
Load deflection curves should be plotted. reasons.
(a) The applied loading history or spectrum, for
8.3.3 Acceptance criteria either single or multiple loads,is not available and is
The structure nlay be deemed to meet the beyond practical methodsof theoretical calculations
serviceability and ultimate l i t state reconmendations (see 7.4). This may apply particularlyto moving or
if all the following conditionsare met: fluid loaded structures where dynanucor resonance
(a) the deflections recorded under the influence of effects can occur. Guidance on methodsof test is
the noninal loads should not exceed those given in 8.4.2.
pernutted at the limit of serviceability; (b) The geometry of the structure is sufficiently
(b) there should be no visible evidenceof nonelastic conlplex that estinutes of member forces or local
defornlation, instability,or other distress underthe stress fields are beyond practical methods of
influence of the noninal loads; calculations (see 7.5). Guidance on methods of test
is given in 8.4.3.
(c) under the factored loadsthe sample should not
show excessive defornmtion, instabilityor signs of (c) The materials, dimensional details, or methods of
inuninent collapse; manufacture of members or joints are different from
those given in tables ‘7.1 to ‘7.3. Guidance on
(d) the residual deflection(s) measured 15 nin after methods of test is given in 8.4.4.
renlod of all loads should not exceed5 % of the
deflection(s) under load. Testing nlay be canled out on conlplete prototype or
production structures or on component parts of those
8.3.4 Retest structures. The degree to which the test stmcture
Where the tested sample fails to meet the criterion of should nlatch the nlatellals. dimensional details and
8.3.3(d) the test nlay be repeated. If, after a nuximum methods of nmufacture of the fulal production
of 10 applications of the factored load the criterion has structure will depend on the infomation being derived
not been met, the sample should be rejected and the from the test (see 8.4.2 to 8.4.4).
rejection recorded inthe report with any observations 8.4.2 Derivation of loading data
on the cause of rejection.
The method of obtaining loading data will dependon
8.3.6 Ultimate resistance measurement the type of structure. Three basic typesare as follows.
The ultimate resistance test is appropriate for type (a) Fixed structures subject to mechanical loading,
testing when large numbers of sinular structures are e.g. bridges, crane girclers and machinely supports.
built. It is not part of an acceptance test procedure. Existing sinular structures subject to the Sanle
Where the test sample is expendable the ultimate loading sources nlay be used to obtain the
resistance nmy be obtained by reapplying the factored amplitude, phasing and frequency ofthe applied
loads in a single increment and then gmdually loads. Strain, deflectionor accelemtion timsducers
increasing all the imposed loads proportionally until fured to selected conlponents which have been
the sanlple is incapable of supporting further load. calibrated under known applied loads can record the
The ultimate load(s) and mode of failure should be force pattern overa typical working peliodof the
recorded, structure, using analog or digital data acquisition
equipment. The conlponents should be selected in
The dtinlate resistance value measured inthe test such a way that the nuin loading components can
should be aausted t.0 take into account the difference be independently deduced usingthe influence
between the nlechanical properties and geometryof coefficients obtained from the calibration loadings.
the test specimen and the ninimunl specified
properties and nonunal geonletry. The results should Alternatively load cells can be mounted at the
be aausted using the appropriate linutstate fornula in interfaces between the applied load and the
sections 4, 5 and G for the particular failure modein structure and a continuous record obtained using
question. the sanle equipnlent.
The ultimate resistance should not be less than y*,
times the factored load. The value of y,, should be the
value relating to that element of the structure where
failure first. occurs.
--``,``,,``,````````,``````,,,,`-`-`,,`,,`,`,,`---

~ ~~~
STD.BS1 BS B 1 1 b : PART 1-ENGL L991 1b24bb9

0794b19 7T9 M
The n w , stiffness and logarithmic decrementof the 8.4.3 Derivation of stress data
test structure should be within30 % of that in the
fmal design and the natural frequencyof the modes 8.4.3.1 Component test data
giving rise to the greatest strain fluctuations should Where simple menlbers occursuch that the main force
be within 10 %. If ths is not the case the loading conlponents in the nlenlber can be calculated or
response should be subsequently verified ona nleasured easily it will be suitableto test conlponents
structure made to the final design. containing the joint or detail to be analysed.
The frequency component of the load spectrum A suitable specimen of identical dinlensions to that
obtained from the working period should be used in the final design should be gauged usinga
nlultiplied by the ratio of the design life to the convenient method suchas electric resistancestrain
working period to obtain the fínal design spectrum. gauges, moiré fringe pattern or thermal elastic
Allowance for growth in anlplitude or frequency techniques. The ends of the conjponent shouldbe
during the design life should also be made as sufficiently f a r from the local asea of interest that the
required. local effectsat the point of application of the applied
o>) Fixed structures subject to environmental loads do not affect the distribution of stress at the
loading, e.g. nlasts, chinmeys and offshore topside point. The force components andthe stress gradients
structures. in the region of interest should be identicalto that in
The methods of derivation of loading spectrum are the whole structure.
basically the sanle as in 8.4.2(a) except that the Influence coefficients can be obtained from statically
working period will generally needto be longer due applied loads which will enablethe stress pattern to be
to the need to obtain a representative spectrum of detemmed for any desired combination of load
environmental loads suchas wind and wave loads. component. If required the Coefficients can be obtained
The fatigue damage tendsto be confined to a from scaled down specinlens providedthe whole
specific band inthe overall loading spectrum dueto conlponent is scaled equally.
--``,``,,``,````````,``````,,,,`-`-`,,`,,`,`,,`---
effects of fluid flow induced resonance.This tends
to be very specific to direction, frequency and 8.4.3.2 Structure test data
damping. Forthis reason greater precisionis needed In certain types of structure such as shell stmctures
in simulating both the structural properties( n w , the continuity of the structural materialmay make it
stiffness and damping) and aerodynamic properties impracticable to isolate conlponents with simple
(cross-sectional geometry). applied forces. In this case stress data should be
It is reconmended that the loading is subsequently obtained from prototypesor production structures.
verified on a structure to the final design if the Similar methods for nleasurement maybe used as for
original loading data is obtained from structures component testing. Formost general use it is
with a natural frequencyor danlping differing by reconmended that static loadsare applied as
more than 10 %, or if the cross-sectional shapeis not independent conlponents so that the stresses can be
identical. combined using the individual influence coefficients for
A final design spectrumcan be obtained in tern^ of the point of interest. The loading should go througha
direction, amplitude and frequencyof loading, shakedown cycle before obtainingthe influence
suitably modified by conlparing the loading data coefficient data.
during the data collection period with the 8.4.3.3 Verification of stress historu
meteorological records obtained over a typical
design life of the structure. The sanle method as described in 8.4.3.2 may be used
(c) Moving structures, e.g. road and rail vehicles, and to venfy the stress history at a point during prototype
boats. testing under a specified loading.In this case data
acquisition equipmentas used in 8.4.2(a) should be
In these types of structure the geometry of the riding used to record either the full stress history or to
surface should be adequately defined in term of perform a cycle counting operation. Thelatter can be
shape and amplitude of undulations and frequency, used to prehct life once the appropriate& - N curve
as this will have a sigruficant effect on the dynandc has been chosen.
loading on the structure. Other loading effects such
as cargo on and off loading can be measured using A further option, which nlay be usedin the case of
the principles outlined in 8.4.2(a). uncertain load histories, is to keep the cycle counting
device permanently attachedto the structure in
Riding surfaces such as purpose-built test tracksmay service.
be used to obtain load histories for prototype
designs. Load data from previous structures should
be used with caution, as snlall differences,
particularly in bogie design for example, can
substantially alter the dynanlic response. Itis
reconmended that loading is verified on the final
design if full scale fatigue testingis not to be
adopted (see 8.4.4).

8.4.4 Derivation of endurance data Where the service loads vary in a random n w e r
between limits they should be represented by an
8.4.4.1 Component testing equivalent seriesof loads agreed betweenthe supplier
Whenever force spectra or stress history data are and the purchaser.
known conlponent testing can be done to ver@the Alternatively, the test load(s) should equalthe
design of critical parts of the structure. The conlponent unfactored load(s)
to be tested shouldbe nmufactured to exactly the
sanle dimensions and proceduresas are intended to be The application of loads to the sample should
used in the final design.All these aspects should be reproduce exactly the application conditions expected
fully documented before nunufacture of the test for the structure or conlponent in service.
conlponent is carried out. In addition any method of Testing should continue until fracture occurs or until
non-destructive testing andthe acceptance criteria the sample is incapable of reacting to the full test load
should be documented, together withthe inspector’s because of damage sustajned.
report on the quality of the joints to be tested. The number of applications of test load(s) to failure
The test specinlens should be loadedin a sinular should be accurately counted and recorded with
manner to that described in 8.4.2(a). Strain gauges observations of the progressive developnlent of
should be used to verify that the stress fluctuations are defects.
as required. The sitingof strain gauges should be such
that they are recording the correct stress parameter 8.4.5 Acceptance
(see 7.5). If the nonlinal stress is being recordedthe The criterion for acceptance depends upon whether
gauge should beat least 10 null from any weld toe. the structure is required to give a safe life performance
Where the stress gradient is steep three gauges should (see (a)), or damage tolerant perfomlance (see as m))
be used to enable interpolation to be carried out. follows.
In order to obtain anfr - N curire for design purposes (a) In a safe life design the d e t e m w g linut state is
a minin~un~ of eight identical specimens should be that defined in 3.6.2. For acceptancethe life to
tested to give endurances in the range 103 to l@ failure determinedby test, @usted to take account
cycles. Testing should be carried out with reference to of the number of test results available, should notbe
the appropriate proceduresin BS 3518. A mean curve less than the factored design lifeas defined in 3.6.2,
should be calculated and a design curve obtained as follows:
which is parallel to the mean curve but not less than Na L factored design life
-
two standard deviations awaynor greater than 80 % of F
the strength value, whicheveris the lower. This allows where
for wider variationsin production than is normally
expected in a single set of fatigue specimens. N, is the logmeanlife to failure;
For danmge tolerance designsa record of fatigue crack
growth with cycles should be obtained. F is a factordependentupon the effective
number of test results available, as
Alternatively, if the design stress history is known and defined in table 8.1.
a variable amplitude facilityis available the specimen
nlay be tested underthe unfactored stress history. (b) In a damage tolerant designthe deternlining limit
8.4.4.2 Full scale testing state is that defined in 3.6.3. Acceptance is
dependent upon the lifeof a crack reaching a size
Full scale testing may be carried out under actual which could be detected bya method of inspection
opemting conditions,or in a testing facility with the which can be applied in service. It also depends on
test load conlponents appliedby hydraulic or other
the rate of growth of the crack, critical crack length
methods of control. considerations, andthe implications forthe residual
The conditions for nmwfacturing the structure should safety of the structure and the costs of repair.
be as for component testingin 8.4.4.1. Criteria for factoring the measured life and for
The loads applied should not exceed the nominal acceptance will vary from one applicationto another
loads. and should be agreed with the engineer responsible
for acceptance.
--``,``,,``,````````,``````,,,,`-`-`,,`,,`,`,,`---

116
Provided by IHS under license with BSI - Uncontrolled Copy Licensee=Rolls Royce Enterprise Wide/5973912035, User=Wootton, JohnO BSI 07-1999
~
STD-BSI BS B11B: PART 1-ENGL 1991 Lb24bb9 079Vb21 357 D

Table 8.1 Fatigue test factor F

Results of test Number of samples tested
'Fi
L 2 4 6 8 9 10
Identical samples all tested to failure. All 3.80 3.12 2.55 2.73
2.48 2.44 2.40
sanlples failed, factors on log meanassunkg
population standard deviationas log 0.176
Identical samples all tested sinwltaneously. 3.80 2.67 2.01 1.75 1.60 1.54 1.54
First sample to fail with population standard
deviation assunledas log 0.176 -
8.5 Reporting (h) m m w of loads and defornmtions andE;tress at

At the conclusion of any testing performedin
citica~acceptance points, correspondingto the
acceptance criteriaas defined in 8.3.3
accordance withthis section a type test certificate
should be compiled containingthe following (i) record of ultinmte load and nlode of failure;
information: a) record of locations of observations by reference
(a) name and addressof the test house; t.4) (e)(2),(ex31 or (eI(4);
(b) accreditation referenceof the test facility (where (k) notes of any observed behaviour relevantto the
appropriate); safety or serviceability of the object under test, e.g.
nature and locationof cracking in fatigue test;
(c) date of test;
(l) record of environmental conditionsat time of
(d) name@)of witnesses; testing where relevant;
(e) description of sanlples tested by: (m) statenlent of validation authority for all
(1) reference to serial number where appropriate; measuring equipment used;
--``,``,,``,````````,``````,,,,`-`-`,,`,,`,`,,`---
or (n) definition of purpose or objectives of test;
(2) reference to drawing nunIber(s) where (o) statenlent of compliance or non-conlpliance with
appropriate; or relevant acceptance criteriaas appropriate;
(3) description with sketches or diagranw; or (P) record of names and status of persons
(4) photographs; responsible for testmg and issuing of report;
(f) description of load systenls applied including (Cr> report serial number and dateof issue.
references to other British Standards where
appropriate;
(g) record of load applications and measured
reactions to loading, i.e. deflection, strain, life;
O BSI 07-1990
117
~ ~~ ~~~ ~ ~~ ~ ~~
STD=BSI BS BLLB: PART L-ENGL L991 m Lb2rlbbS 0794b22 293

BS 8118 :Part 1 : 1991 Appendix A
Appendices
Appendix A. Nomenclature of aluminium A.2.4 National variations

products National variations of wrought alunmun~and wrought
aluminium alloys registered byanother country are
A.l Introduction identified by a serial letter afterthe numerical
Complete information on the nomenclature of designation. The serial letters are assigned in
structural wrought aluminium productsis to be found alphabetical sequence startingwith A for the first
in the British Standards for wrought aluminium alloys national variation registered, but omitting I, O and Q.
for general engineering purposes. The nomenclature A.3 Temper or condition
for casting alloysdoes not follow the same
nomenclature systemas wrought alloys and reference A.3.1 General
should be made to BS 1490. The following notes, The designation for the temper or condition of the
however, serveas a general guidefor wrought alloys. aluminium or aluminium alloy is indicated by a letter
A.2 Alloys groups which may be followed bya number or numbers. This
part of the designation followsthe alloy group
A.2-1 General designation andis separated by a hyphen.
The first part of an alloy designation indicatingthe A.3.2 Non-heat-treatable allogs
alloy group consists of four digits as follows:
The non-heat-treatable alloys (e.g.5083) are those for
which strength can be increased only by strain
(a) A l u n ~ u m99.00 % (dm) l*** hardening. This s t&hardening may be deliberate, as
n m u m and greater in the stretch straightening of an extrusion, or due to
@) Aluminium alloys groups by mqor forming or other cold working of a finished product.
alloying elements The tempers of non-heat-treatableproducts are
(1) Copper 2 * * * identified by the following suffiï letters and symbols:
(2) Manganese 3***
(3) Silicon 4*** F As fabricated. Thistemperdesignation
(4)Magnesium 5*** applies to material which acquires some
(5) Magnesium ‘and silicon 6*** temper from shaping processes in which
there is no special control over thernd
(6) Zinc 7*** treatment or amount of strain hardening. For
( 7 ) Other element B*** wrought products there are no mechanical
(S) Unused series 9*** properly huts.
A.2.2 11 S 1 group O Annealed. T ~ temper N designationapplies to

In the l*
aulnM un
**
group for minimum purities of
lof 99.00 % ( d m )and greater,the last two
material which is fully annealed to obtain the
lowest strength condition.
of the four digits inthe designation indicatethe H Strain-hardened. This temperdesignation
minimum aluminium percentage. These digitsare the applies to nlaterial subjected to the
sanle as the two digits to the nght of the decimal point application of cold work and partial
in the minimum aluminium percentage when itis annealing (or hot forming),or to a
expressed to the nearest 0.01% ( d m ) . combination of cold work and partial
The second digit in the designation indicates annealing or stabilizing, in order to achieve
modifications in impurity limits or alloying elements. If the specified mechanical properties. TheH is
the second digit in the designation is zero, it indicates always followed by two or more digits
unalloyed aluminium having natural impurity linlits: indicating the fmal degree of strain-hardening.
integers 1 to 9, which are assigned consecutively as
needed, indicate special control of one or more The first digit following the H indicates the specific
individual impurities or alloying elements. combination of basic operationsas follows:
A.2.3 2 b 1 1to 8 groups *** H l Strain-hardened only. This temper
Inthe2*fc*toS8**~upsthelasttwoofthe
four digits in the designation haveno special designation appliesto material subjectedto
sigruficance but serve onlyto identify the different the application of cold work after annealing
aluminium alloys inthe group. The second digitin the or hot forming.
alloy designation indicates alloy modifications. If the H2 Stmin-harde)2ed and partially annealed. This
second digit inthe design is zero, it indicatesthe temper designation appliesto achieve the
origml alloy. Integers 1 to 9, whch are assigned
specified mechanical properties.
consecutively, indicate alloy modifications.
H3 Strain-hardenedandstabilized.
--``,``,,``,````````,``````,,,,`-`-`,,`,,`,`,,`---

118
Provided by IHS under license with BSI - Uncontrolled Copy Licensee=Rolls Royce Enterprise Wide/5973912035, User=Wootton, JohnO BSI 07-1999
The second digit (2,4,6 or 8) following the Hl or H2 A.5 Temper nomenclature for alloys in
designation indicates the degreeof strain-hardening in standards which have not adopted the IS0 2107
ascending order of temper. alternative temper designation system
The effect of heating these nmterialsis to reduce their A.5.1 General
strength. Strength can only be recovered by further
strain-hardening. Those alloys covered by British Standards which have
not adopted the IS0 2107 alternative temper
A.3.3 Heat-treatable alloys designation system use the following existing British
The heat-treatable alloys(e.g. 6082) derive enhanced Standard temper designation system.
strength from either oneor two stages of heat A.5.2 Non-heat-treatable alloys
treatment. The first stage, solution heat treatment, The temper of non-heat-treatable products are
consists of heatmg the material thoroughly to a
prescribed high tenlperature and then quenching in it identified by the following suffm letters and symbols:
cold water, the quench increasesthe strength
considerably fromthat of the hot, annealed condition. O annealed
Softest,
i.e.
The second stage, precipitation heat treatment,or
ageing, when the material is kept for a prescribed time M As manufactured,
i.e.
partly
hardened
at a prescribed moderate tenlperature, producesa in the 0rduw-y course of manufacture
further increase in strength. With some alloys ageing H2 to H8 Progressivedegrees of hardness
occurs naturally after somedays or weeks at room
temperature, so that the second fornml heat treatment
may be discarded. The conditionof a heat-treatable A.5.3 Heat-treatable alloys
product is identified by the following suffii letters and The condition of heat-treatable productis identified by
symbols. For full details andother subdivisions see
--``,``,,``,````````,``````,,,,`-`-`,,`,,`,`,,`---
one or two suffiw letters as follows:

BS 1470 and BS 1474.
O Annealed
O Annealed
M As manufactured,withnofornlalheat
F As fabricated,with no fornd heat treatment treatment
T4Solutionheat-treatedandnaturallyaged TBSolution heat-treated
T5 Cooled from an elevated tenlperature shaping (TB7 solution heat-treated and stabilized, applies
to
process and then artificially aged Castings)
TG Solutionheat-treatedandthenartificially TF N l y , i.e. two stage, heat-treated
aged
TE Artificially aged without prior solution heat
T8 Solution heat-treated, cold worked and then treatment
artificially aged.
TH Solution heat-treated, cold worked and then
artificially aged
A.4 Examples of alloy and temper nomenclature
Examples of alloy and temper nonlenclature are as
follows: A.5.4 Examples of alloy and temper
nomenclature
Examples of alloy and temper nomenclature are as
(a) 5154A-H24 Indicates the non-heat-treatable follows:
nugnesiunl bearing rough alloy
5154 with a national variation,
which has been strain-hardened (a) LM25-lX Indicatestheheat-treatable
and partially annealedto achieve magnesium-silicon casting alloy
the specified mechanical LM25 with precipitation heat
properties fora temper half way treatment only.
between the annealed and fully
hardened tenlper condition. @) 7020-TF Indicates the heat-treatable zinc
bearing wrought alloy7020 in the
@) GO82-TG Indicates the heat
treatable fully heat-treated fornl.
magnesium-silicon wrought alloy
6082, in the fully heat-treated
foml.

~~ ~~ ~ ~~~
STD.BSI BS 8118: PART 1-ENGL L771 m 1b2rlbb9 077qb24 Obb m

BS 8118 :Part 1 : 1991 Appendix A
A.6 Foreign equivalents to British Standard

alloys
Table A.l lists the nearest foreign equivalentsof the
British Standard wrought andcast alloys referred to in
tables 2.1 and 2.2. They are not necessarily exact
equivalents, and for detailedinformation on their
conlpositions and properties reference should be nlade
to the relevant national standards. The formerBritish
Standard designations forthe alloys listedin tables 2.1
and 2.2 are also given.
--``,``,,``,````````,``````,,,,`-`-`,,`,,`,`,,`---

120
O RSI 07-1999
Appendix A Bs 8118 : Ihrt 1 : 1-1
3103 AlMnl N3 3103 AlMn AlMIll P-AlMn1.2 - L-38111Al-IMn

-
--``,``,,``,````````,``````,,,,`-`-`,,`,,`,`,,`---
3106 AlMn0,5M@,5 N31 3106 - 3106 iuMno,5M@,5 - A3105 L383l/Al-O,5"g

5083 AlMg4,5MnO,7 NB 5083 ALMg4,5Mn 5083 5083 6083 AMg4,5Mn P-AlMg4,5 AMY13 L332UAI4,5Mg
5154A AlMg3,XA) N5 5154A - 5154 - 5154 - A5154 LrnAI-3,5Mg
5251 AlMg2 N4 5251 - 5251 - U51 Ab@Mn0,3 P-AlblgZbín - L33611Al-ZMg
6454 Al Mg3Mn N51 5454- 5454 5454 5454 AIMg2,7Mn P-AlM@,"n A5464 L3391/Al-3Mgbln
6061 AlMglSiCu H20 6061 - 8081 6061 6061 ALMglSiCu P-AlMglsKxl A6061 L342WAl-lMgSicu
6063 AlMg0,751 H9 6063- 6063 P-Al Si0.5Mg A6063 L-3441/AI-O,7M@i
h WS2 AlSilMgbfn H30 6082- 8082 - BOB2 Albl@il P-AISilMgMn - L3453IAl-Isi"n
7020 AlZn4.5Mgl H17 7020 AIZn4,SMgl 7020 - 7020 - P-AIZn4,5Mg Am01 L37411AI-4ZnlMg
LM6 AlMg6Sil LM6 514.1 GAM@ SG W GS40 AG6 GAI&@ GAlMlg ADcGClAV L2331
FIAS AG7A
A4132
A356.2
356.2
GAlSi
-
SG AlSi12
DG ALSll2Fe
SG AlSi7Mg
SUN A413
Sc 70N A-S7G
S 7 0 A-S7009
GALS112
GAISI7Mg
GAlSi13
GAlSI'IMgW,
D N DIS
A D c l c3Av
c3As Ac3A
C4CVC4CS
AoIcAC4CH
GAISil3
A4132
GAlSi7m
I
357.1 A-S7GO6 oIcIK3
A367.2
I21

Appendix B. Formal statement of safety where
factor format adopted in the code for R, is the mean resistance based on calculations
static design resistance calculations using the arithmetic meanof material
strength test results;
B.l Nominal load
v is the relativemeanquadraticdeviation of
The nonWal load, or characteristic action(Fk) is that the distribution of material strength found by
value of the applied load whichhas an expected return tests, or the coefficient of variation of the
period of not less thanthe specified design life of the distribution function;
structure, (often obtained from loading specifications).
B.2 Factored load k is a coefficientdepending on the probability
distribution function.
The factored load,or design action P d ) is deternwed
from the nominal load bythe following relationship: B.5 Factored resistance
The factored resistanceor design resistance@d ) is
F d = Yf F
K determined fromthe relationship:
where
y is the load factorfor the load in question. Rk
Rd = -
B.3 Action-effect under factored loading ym
where
The acticn-effect under factoredloading, or design
actim-effect(sd) is the effect of the factored load,or Ym is the nlaterial strength factor.
combination of factored loads onthe structural B.6 Verification of structural adequacy
member (forces, moments, etc.) For a satisfactory design,the following relationship
should be satisfied:
B.4 Nominal resistance Rd > figure B.l)
(see
The n o n w resistance, or characteristic resistance where
(Rd is defined by the relationship: yc is the factor for consequences of failure
Rk = &n (1 - h), (taken as unity for nornlal applications).
Action - effect
under factored load
I
I
Nominalresistance
Factoredresistance
--``,``,,``,````````,``````,,,,`-`-`,,`,,`,`,,`---
Resistance R
Figure B.l Ultimate limit state criterion

O BSI 07-1999
Provided by IHS under license with BSI - Uncontrolled Copy Previous page is
Licensee=Rolls blank
Royce Enterprise Wide/5973912035, User=Wootton, John 123
Appendix C. m i c a l values of design life D.2 Limiting stress for weld metal
The fatigue assessment procedure (see7.3) requires a D.2.1 Enhanced values of p ,
design l i e for the structure. When this Me is not The values forthe weld metal limitingstress P, in
specified by the client, the designer may use the typical table 6.2 are based on test results for butt-welded
values @ven in table C.l specimens. With certain of the permitted filler alloys it
is found that higher weld strengthsthan those given in
rlhble C.l Qpical values of design life
Structure Design life
1 table 6.2 apply. In order to take advantage of this in
design it is permissible to take P, from table D.l,
instead of table 6.2.
Years It is emphasized that these higher valuesare only valid
Highway bridges 120 if every precautionis taken to avoid cracking.
Flood protection works 100 D.2.2 Determination of p , for other material
Buildings, prinwy structure 100 When welds are made on parent alloys not covered in
Breakwaters GO table D.l, the limiting weld metalstress P, should be
Lattice towers and nlasts 50 obtained experinlentally.
Tall towers 50 D.3 Limiting stress for H A Z material
--``,``,,``,````````,``````,,,,`-`-`,,`,,`,`,,`---
Railway vehicles 35 D.3.1 Basic expressions

Building cladding 30 The limiting stresses P, and pw for HAZ material used
30 in the design of welded joints, as listed in table 6.3, are
Boats
based on the relevant expression fromthe following.
Cranes 20 These expressions may be employedfor materials not
Containers 15 covered in that table.
Vehicle bodies 10 (a) Heat-treatable material:
Scaffolding 10
P, = kz'Pa
P, = 0.GPa.Z
Appendix D. Derivation of material where
limiting stresses for use in design
P, is the linuting stress for parent metal, as
D.l Limiting stresses for parent metal given by table 4.1or by D.l;
NOTE. See sections 4 and 5.
The linutingstresses P,, pa and pv used in the design is the modified softening factor found
of menlbers, as listed in tables 4.1 and 4.2, are based k' from F.2.
on the following expressions. These expressions nlay @) Non-heat-treatable material:
be employed to obtain po, Pa and p, for nlaterials not P, = L2fm
covered in tables4.1 and 4.2. P, = 0 . G h
where
f02 is the guaranteed minimum 0.2 % proof
stress for the parent metal concerned,if
it is in the annealed O condition. When
only a typical value of f0.2 is available, a
figure equalto 80 % of this should be
used in the expression forP,.
D.3.2 7% *seriesmaterial
wherefo.2 andf, itre nomdly taken as the guaranteed The alternative valuesA and B for P, and P, are
mininlunl tensile 0.2 % proof stress and tensile strength obtained by using the relevant value of k; in D.3.l(a).
of the material respectively. When no guaranteed value
is quoted for one or both, assumed valuesmay be used The value of k; is normally as given in F.2. When
for& and fu as follows: finding valueA, however, it is sometimes possible to
take a more favourable valueof Ici This applies when
(1) values equalto 80 % of the typical values given
by the nmufacturers; or either of the following occur
(2) the values for the sune nlaterial in the (a) a single pass weld is laid in isolation; or
O condition. @) stricter thermal controlis exercised than that
normally called for in BS 8118 : Part 2.

124
O BSI 07-1999
a b l e D.1 Limiting stress pwfor weld metal 1
Filler Parent metal
Non-heat treatable I Heat-treatable
31031200
3106
5251 6454 5164A
5083 I 6063
6061
6082
1080A 1
MOA
-
190
190
215 205
5056A
215 220
5556A
55541) -
210
l) These alloys should be used in conditions where corrosion is likely to be a problem.
NOTE. When using dissimilar parent metals the lower value of the two limiting stresses for the weld metal should be given.
I
Refer to F.2.3, cases 1 and 2. E.2 Elasto-plastic stress pattern
--``,``,,``,````````,``````,,,,`-`-`,,`,,`,`,,`---
E.2.1 Rules for constructing stress pattern.
Appendix E. Elasto-plastic moment An idealized elasaplastic stress pattern is constructed,
calculation based on an assumed nlaterial with sudden yield atpo
(instead of the true st-strain curve). w i c a l
E.l General examples appear in figure E.l. The rules for
This appendix gives an alternative method for constructing such a pattern are as follows.
obtaining the factored moment resistanceMm of (a) Calculations shouldbe made using a net section,
slender and senu-compact beam sections, which nmy with deductions for holes, but with no reductionin
be used instead of 4.6.2 or 5.4.2. thickness to allow for HAZ or local bucklig effects.
The elasto-pla&c method presented will prove (b) Elements are classified in accordance
advantageous for sectionsin which a critical element with 4.3.3.4 (but see note).
for local buckling, havinga pvalue roughly in the
region of 3
/,
(see table4.3),contains compressed (c) The limiting compressivestress P , in a slender
material that lies nearerthe neutral axis than do the element is found thus:
outermost tension fibresof the section. m i c a l Pm = ~ L P O
examples are sections in which where
(a) the extreme compression material, incorporating P, is the limiting stres for material (see tables 4.1
a critical flange element, lies nearerto the neutral and 4.2);
axis than does the extreme tension nlaterial (see
kL is the local buckling factor foundas in 4.3.4.2
figure E.l(a)): or
(but see note).
(b) a critical web element terminates some distance
in from the extreme compression face, dueto the For a longitudwy stiffened web different valuesof
P m will in general be thus obtained forthe various
presence of a tongue-plate (see figureE.l@)).
sub-panels, based on their differingk~ values
NOTE. The use of this appendix may prove disadvantageous when (see 5.4.4.2).
applied to sections in which the critical element is very slender
Co * ßo). (d) The stress pattern should be such that the total
force in compression balances that in tension.
O BSI 07-1999
125
~~~ ~ ~~
~
STD-BSI BS 8118: PART J-ENGL 1991 ItbZ'ibb9 0794bZ9 b'i8 W

BS 8118 :Part 1 : 1991 Appendix E
(e) On the tension side the extreme fibrestress E.3 Calculation of moment resistance
should not exceedP,. It is pernissible for plasticity
to spread in from this face. E.3.1 General
The factored moment resistanceMB is found as
(f) On the conlpression sidethe stress in any
element should not exceeda limiting valuep as follows:
follows: MRS= M u h m
(1) fully compact or semi-compact element,p = po; where
(2) slender element, p = Pm.
Mu is the ultinlate moment found from E.3.2 or
(g) It is permissible for plasticity to spread in from E.3.3;
the compression faceof the section, only if the y,,, is the material factor (see table 3.3).
compression flangeis fully compact.
(h) For a section witha fully compact compression E.3.2 Slender sections
flange, and witha tongue-plate ascent to the Mu is taken as the moment correspondingto the
compression edgeof a semi-compact or slender web adopted stress-pattern (see E.2).
(see figure E.l(b)), the distance that plasticity may
spread in from the compression face is limited as E.3.3 Semi-compact sections
follows: Mu is found by interpolation as follows:
(1) senucompact web: plasticity to to extend
MU=M,+"- ßo - (Md - IVus)
beyond the compression edge of the web. ß o - P1
(2) slender web: rule f(2) to be satisfied for the where
web.
u) In any HAZ region the stress should be reduced Mus is the moment corresponding to the
to Mo,if this is less than the general stress level adopted stress pattern (see E.2.1);
therein. It is not pernutted to use u.
NOTE. In applying rules @) and (c) the value E should always be
determined using the expression in note 1 of table 4.3. The
Muf
ß
is the moment value
obtained if the
section is treated as fully compact;
is the value o f ß for the critical
I
modified E value given in 4.3.3.5 or note 3 of 4.5.2.3 is not valid element;
for use with this appendix. ß1 and ßo are the fully compact and
E.2.2 Hgbrid sections semi-compact limiting values of ß for
In applying E.2.1 to a hybrid section, fabricated from that element (see table4.3).
components of differing strength, itis helpful to NOTE. The limitations on the spreading in of plasticity from the
Emember that the strain distribution will be linear compression face of the section, contained in E.2.1 (rules (8)
right across the section. This has the following and (h)), relate to the determination of M
,
. When the ultimate
implications forthe assumed stress pattern. moment Mu acts, there will generally be an increased spread of
plasticity.
(a) In the elastic zone the stress varies linearly either
side of the neutral axis, without steps.
(b) In any plastic zonethere will be a stepchange in
stress between nlaterials of different P,.
(c) At the junction betweenthe elastic and plastic
zones there will also be a step, if this junction
coincides with a change in nuterial.
--``,``,,``,````````,``````,,,,`-`-`,,`,,`,`,,`---

12G
~~
STD-BSI BS 8118: PART 1-ENGL 1991 l b 2 4 b b 7 0774b30 3bT

Appendix E BS 8118 :Part 1 : 1991
Critical element
Compression
e-fElastic neutral
--``,``,,``,````````,``````,,,,`-`-`,,`,,`,`,,`---
P Criticalelement
@I
Line 1: critical element is semicompact.
Line 2: critical element is slender.
Figure E.l. Assumed elasto-plastic stress patterns (non-hybrid)

Provided by IHS under licenseO BSI 07-1999
with BSI - Uncontrolled Copy Licensee=Rolls Royce Enterprise Wide/5973912035, User=Wootton, John 127
--``,``,,``,````````,``````,,,,`-`-`,,`,,`,`,,`---
Appendix F. HAZs adjacent to welds F.2.2 k,for other materials

F.1 Introduction The softening factor(IC,or k$) may be found using
F.l.l General table F2 for materials not covered in tables 4.5 and El.
The methods provided in 4.4 for estinming the severity F.2.3 7* *
*series material
and extent of HAZ softening adjacentto welds will At welds in such alloys with tensile stress acting
sonletimes tend to be pessimistic. This appendix gives transverse to the weld axis, the softening factor
alternative treatments for such cases, which produce (k,=k$)should be taken as value A. For other stress
more favourable valuesof k, (severity, see F.2) and z conditions valueB may be used.
(extent, see F.3). Value A should nornmlly be takenas in the relevant
The possible benefits of post-weld artificial ageing are table (table4.5 or table El). However, a more
considered in F.4. favourable valueis allowed in the following cases:
As an altemativeto calculation it is pemuible to find (a) Case 1. Isolated straight singlepass weld without
the extent of the HAZ experimentally by means of a preheat: valueA nlay be takenthe sanle as value B,
hardness survey. Guidance for so doing is given in F.5. nanlely 1.0 for the T4 condition and 0.8 for the TG
F.1.2 Thermal control condition.
The extent of HAZ softening, and sonletinlesits (b) Case 2. Other welds, withstricter thermal control
severity, depend on the inter-pass temperatureT,, i.e. exercised than that nornmlly called for in BS 8118 :
the temperature of the adjacent parent metal atthe Part 2: value A may be taken as follows:
start of laying any weld pass. The following factors (1) for 40 "C < T, I 80 "C
tend to elevate T,: for T4 condition 1.2 - 0.005T0
(a) deposition of previous passes in a multi-pass
for TG condition 1.0 - 0.005To I
joint; (2) for T, 5 40"C
(b) previous weldingof a nearby joint; for T4 condition 1.0
(c) use of preheat. for TG condition 0.8
where
Excessive build-up of.tenlperaturecan be prevented by
exercising thermal control during fabrication,that is by To is the interpass temperature,to be stated in the
letting the metal cool down adequately between contract specification.
passes. The methods in4.4.2 and 4.4.3 for estimating F.3 Extent of H A Z
HAZ effects are valid if the thermal control satisfies F.3.1 General
BS 8118 : Part 2, nanlely: The methods given in 4.4.3, for obtaining the
(a) 7 series alloys T, 5 80 "C;
T, 5, 100 "C. of
***
dinlension
the H A Z .
z, may lead to an overestimate of the extent
The following sections give alternative
(b) other alloys
treatments, which can be used to obtain more
It is often possibleto reduce the extent of the HAZ favourable estimates in some cases.
softening, and sometimes its severity, by exercising
stricter themml controlthan this, i.e. by specifymg a F.3.2 Modtifiedformula for z
lower value for To.In order to take advantage of such It is pemlissible to use the following expression forx ,
improvement, the designer should state in the instead of that given i
n 4.4.3.2:
specification that tighter control is to apply, and give z = 6aqzo
the reduced value to which T, should now be linuted. where
More favourable HAZ rules are provided in F.2.3, F.3.3 a and q are modifyq factors (see 4.4.3.4
and F.3.4, which may be used when such a practice is and 4.4.3.5);
adopted. X0 is the basic
value of z.
F.2 Softening factor k, The extra factor6 would normally be taken as 1.0, but
F.2.1 Modified values of k, in the following cases (a) and (b) a lower value is
allowed.
When the resistance is governed by pa or P , rather
than P,, it is pernkible to take a modified valuek; (a) For a joint away from whichthere are three or
for the softening factoras given in table El, instead of more valid heat-paths
the nomml value k, from table4.5. T ~ I applies
S for the 6 = 0.75
following: A valid heat-path beingas defined in 4.4.3.5.
(a) shear in beanls (see4.5.3); @) For a straight jointof length L less the 5z0:
(b) local failurein tension members (see4.6.2.3); 6 = (1.5 + 1.%/~,)/(3+ Uzo)
(c) local squashingin struts (see 4.7.7).
When a joint comes into both these categories, 6
The use of the nlodified value k$ for these is should be takenas the lower of the values given by (a)
favowable for most(but not all) n~aterials. and (b) respectively.

128
STDOBSI BS BLLB: PART 1-ENGL 1991 m LbZ'ibb9 079qb32 132
Appendix F BS 8118 :Part 1 : 1991
~ ~~
lbble F.1 Modified H A Z softening factor

4noy Condition
G.
Heat-treatable
GOG1 TG, TF 0.55
6063 T4 1.00
T4 0.70
T4 0.80
T5 0.75
TG 0.55
T6 0.50
6082 T4 1.00
T6 0.55
7020 T4 O.SO(A), 1.00(B)
TG O.GO(A), 0.80@)
(see note 2)
Non-heat treatable
1200 H14 0.25
3103 H14 0.30
H18 0.24
3105 H14 0.28
H1G 0.24
H18 0.21
--``,``,,``,````````,``````,,,,`-`-`,,`,,`,`,,`---
5083 o, F 1.o0
H22 0.55
5 154A O,F 1.00
H22 0.50
H24 0.40
5251 F 0.30
F 1.o0
H22 0.45
H24 0.35
5454 o, F 1.00
H22 0.45
H24 0.40
NOTE 1. In the product column E, , P, DT,WT and F refer respectively to extrusion, sheet, plate, drawn tube, welded tube-
and forgings.
NOTE 2. For 7020 material refer to 4.4.2.2, for the applicability of the A and B values.

O BSI 07-1999
129
'Pdble F.2 General determination of k, and k;
Alloy series Condition k, (see notes 1 and 2)
Heat-treatable
G*** o, F 1.00
T4 1.00
T5 O.75
TG 0.50
Other (see note 3) 0.50 P o d P o
7*** O,F 1.00
T4 0.80(A)
1.00(B)
--``,``,,``,````````,``````,,,,`-`-`,,`,,`,`,,`---
TG O.GO(A)
0.80(B)
Other 0*6POdPO(A)
(see note3) 0.8POdPO@)
Non-heat-treatable
1***,3***or5*** o, F 1.00
Other (see note 3) PodPo
NOTE 1. k, is the normal value. 12;is a modified value for use in certain cases (see F.2.1).
NOTE 2. Notation is as follows:
p o and pa are the limiting stress for parent material in the condition used (se tables 4.1 and 4.2);
poGand paGare the limiting stresses for the parent materials in the TG - condition.
poo and pao are the limiting stresses for the parent materials in the O - condition.
NOTE 3. The value taken should never exceed 1.0.
E3.3 Alternative determinationof (Y @) Stricter thermal controlis exercised than that

It is pernwible to take a lower value of (Y for cases Q called for in BS 8118 : Part 2
and R in table 4.G for a joint to which either (a) or @)
applies as follows. IC S 25 mm tC > 25 mm
(a) Nornd thernd control is exercised (ascalled 0.5Tl 5 To < T1 (Y = 0.5 + 01 = 2TJTl
for in BS 8118 : Part Z), tc does not exceed 25 nun +TV1
and the total area A (in nun2) of all weld deposits in To 5 (Y = 1.0 (Y = 1.0
the joint is known:
where
A 5 50 (Y = 1.0 To is the reduced interpass temperature (to be
stated in specification);
50 A I150 O! = 0.75 + 0.005A
T1 is the normal interpass t e m p e m e in
A > 150 01 = 1.5 accordance withBS 8118 : Part 2,
= 80 "C for 7 ***
series alloys;
= 100 "C for other alloys;
tc is the thickness of thickest part joined.

130
Provided by IHS under license with BSI - Uncontrolled Copy Licensee=Rolls Royce Enterprise Wide/5973912035, User=Wootton, John O E S 1 07-1999
STD-BSI BS 8118: PART 2-ENGL 199L W L b 2 4 b b 9 0794b34 T 0 5 W
Appendix F BS 8118 :Part 1 : 1991
F.3.4 Alternative determinationof q F.5.2 Experimental method

When stricter thernlal control is specified than that The preferred method employsthe Vickers Diamond
required by BS 8118 : Patt 2, it is pernutted to read q technique. This may be applied to an actual prototype,
from figure El instead of finding it from 4.4.3.5. The or to a trial fabrication representing partof an overall
quantities needed forthe figure should be taken as structure. The procedure is to take a series of hardness
follows: readings at varying distances fromthe weld, and hence
(a) To, Tl and tc are as defined in F.3.3; deternine atwhat point the full parent properties are
regained. Preferably,the specimen should be sectioned
(b) h and hl are as defined in 4.4.3.5;
perpendicular to the weld, and readings taken at
1
(c) denotes sunmation for all heat-paths from the nud-thickness on the cut face (after suitable surface
joint. Preparation). However it nlaybe possible to take the
NOTE. When t C > 25 mm and preheat is used, no improvenlent in r e a h g s directly on to the surface of the conlponent.
q is permitted. In such cases the full value q = 1.33 should be
used. E5.3 Interpretation method 1
F.4 Post-weld artificial ageing There are two pernutted methodsfor interpreting the
With the G and 7 ** ***
series heat-treatable
alloys it is sonletinles beneficialto apply heat
results, of which the following (method1) is
preferable.
treatment in the form of artificial ageing after welding. A typical hardness plotis of the form shown in
This involves heating the welded conlponent toa figure F.2, on which it is usually possibleto distinguish
tenlperature in the range 100 "C to 180 "C for a t h e of two points A and B as shown. The dimensionz, used
up to 24 h. The exact procedure dependson the alloy. in design to define the distance that the assunled HAZ
The following benefits nlay be obtained by such extends from the weld, should be takenas follows:
z = 0.5 (X, + X B )
--``,``,,``,````````,``````,,,,`-`-`,,`,,`,`,,`---
treatment.
(a) The thne to reach stable nmhanical properties is where
reduced to a value belowthat indicated in 4.4.2.3.
(b) The strength of parts of the HAZ, but not X, and X B are the distances of points A and B
necessarily the whole, is raised. In design this nxty from the centre-line of a butt weld or
be assunled to effectively reduce the extent of the the root of a fillet weld.
HAZ.
F.5.4 Interpretation method 2
(c) Sonle improvement will occur in the strength of
the weld metal. This nlay have to be used if only point B can be
distinguished on the plot, i.e. the point at which parent
In order to quantify these benefits itis necessary to hardness is effectively regained, pointA being difficult
carry out tests, using representative specimens to locate. In this case z should be taken as follows:
(see F.5). These should accuratelysindate the true
situation in terns of: metal thickness, geometry, filler (a) for 5 series alloys z = 0.65X~; ***
metal and welding paranleters,as well as the exact (b) for 6 series alloys z = 0.75X~; ***
post-weld treatment enlployed. (c) for 7 series alloys z = o.go&. ***
F.5 Hardness surveys
F.5.1 General
It is pernutted to detemine the extent of the HAZ
experinlentally (see4.4.3.7), the most usual procedure
is to conduct a hardness survey.

O BSl 07-1999 Licensee=Rolls Royce Enterprise Wide/5973912035, User=Wootton, John
131
1.5 1
/
1.o 1.5 4
l
.2 i
rl / 1.0
.4
1
i
t p 2 5 mm
1.2
1.4
I
I 1.6
~
1.8
1.0 -L 1 .o I I
O 0.5 1.0 TOIT O 0.5 1.0 TOI6
(a> @>
Figure F.l Extent of HAZ, factor
B
0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
O
O E
O
O
O
S L
u
I n
O
x4 5
o A
O o o o o
c
Y)
t
QI
v1
'P
L
O
I
Figure F.2 Qpical hardness plot along a heat path from a weld
--``,``,,``,````````,``````,,,,`-`-`,,`,,`,`,,`---

132
Appendix G. General formulae for the The first sunmation is extended to every filletor bulb
torsional properties of thin-walled open region within the section (see figureG.l).
sections In nmking the sheared sununation forthe flat elements,
the width of any element abuttingon a fillet or bulb
6.1 General should now be measuredto the edge of the shaded
This appendix shows howto detemme certain section area shown in figure G.l.
properties, neededin buckling calculations that involve 6.3 Polar second moment of area about shear
torsion (see appendicesH and J). The section centre
properties are as follows: The polar second momentof area about the shear
centre, Zp,is given by the following:
(a) torsion constantJ (see 6.2);
Zp = Zx + Zy + Ag2
(b) polar second momentof area about shear centre,
Zp (see6.3); where
(c) warping factorH (see 6.4).
Z, and Zy are secondmoments of area about
For sections not coveredby the procedures given in centroidal axes;
this appendix, refer to the l i t e m e . A is the section are%
6.2 Torsion constant 9 is the distance
between
centroid G
and shear centre S.
The torsional stiffnessof a member having a
thin-walled cross-sectionis given by the product of GJ, The position of S may be found as follows:
where G is the shear modulus of the nuterial and J is
the torsion constant of the cross-section. For (a) for bisymnletric or skewsynunetric sections, S
thin-walled open sections without pronounced coincides with G
dations of thickness, suchas fillets or bulbs, J is (b) for sections composed entirely of radiating
given by the following: outstands (such as angles, tees or cruciforms), S lies
at the point of intersection of the component
J = J!!?!3 elements;
(c) for certain specific typesof section, see
O
figure G.2;
where
(d) for monosynmetric sections composedof flat
elements, generally,see 6.5;
--``,``,,``,````````,``````,,,,`-`-`,,`,,`,`,,`---
t is the thickness;
S is measuredalong the nuddlelineof the (e) for asynmetric sections composed of flat
profile; elements, generally,see 6.7.
S is the totallength of thenuddleline.
6.4 Warping factor
For a section composed solelyof flat plate elements, The warping factorH may be found as follows:
each of uniform thickness, this equation reduces to the
(a) for sections composed entirelyof radiating
following: outstands (such as angles, tees or crucifomB), H
J = -1C b $ , may be conservatively assunledto be zero;
3 @) for certain specific typesof section, see
where b is the width of an element, measuredat the figure G.2;
mid-thickness of the profile.When such a section is (c) for monosymmetric sections composedof flat
reinforced with fillets and/or bulbs,the following elements, see 6.5;
expression may be used
(d) for skewsymnletric sections composed of flat
J = C ( 0 3 + qN)tI4 + $bt3 elements, see 6.6;
(e) for asymmetric sections composedof flat
where elements, see 6.7.
t is the thickness of adjacent flat
material;
N is the fillet or bulb
dimension, as
defrned in figure G.1;
Pandq are coefficients to be readfrom
figure G.1.

BSI 07-1999
O with BSI - Uncontrolled Copy
Provided by IHS under license Licensee=Rolls Royce Enterprise Wide/5973912035, User=Wootton, John 133
~~
STD-BSI BS 8118: PART L-ENGL 1991 U Lb2qbb9 079qb37 7Lq W

BS 8118 : Part 1 : 1991 Appendix G
--``,``,,``,````````,``````,,,,`-`-`,,`,,`,`,,`---
26
S1
?+P
Figure G.l Torsion constant coefficients forcertain fillets and bulbs

134
O BSI 07-1999
3b
e=- e = a'b't
- 1 c
-+" -
F+6 I , (4 2b 3a2b
b2t
H = - (46 + + 3a2c
6
+ a") - $1,
E
--``,``,,``,````````,``````,,,,`-`-`,,`,,`,`,,`---
+ a2b)
IV 4I-t
e = 3111 - 3212
Y'
X H = a2l1I,
~
- a"l,
- 4
+ C"',(a2 + ")3
Y'
where I, and I' are the
respective second moments
of area of the flanges about
the W axis
IY
b%
H=
12(2b +a + 2c)
X (a2(b' + 26a. + 4bc + 6ac) +
+ 4c2(3ba + 3a' + 4bc + 2ac + C')}
Figure 6.2 Shear centre position (S) and warping factor (H) for certain thin-walled sections

135
G.5 Monosymmetric sections composed of flat 6.5.3 Specimen calculation
elements Table G.l gives a specimen calculation fora
6.5.1 Notation and signConvention nlonosymmetric section. The elements taken into
consideration in this calculation are the numbers
The section is broken down into2V flat elements, within trianglesin the diagram in table G.l.
numbered 1 to Von each sideof the axis of
symmetry AA, counting outwards fromthe point B 6.6 Skew-symmetric section composed of flat
where the cross-section intersectsAA (see figure G.3). elements
The following notation relatesto the Rth element in G.6.1 Notation and signconvention
the upper half of the section:
The section is broken down into2V flat elements,
b is the elementwidth; numbered from 1 to Von each side of the point of
t is the elementthickness; synmetry G, counting towards G (see figure G.4). The
a is the perpendiculardistancefromnudpoint following notation relates to the Rth element inthe
of the element to AA; upper half of the section:
c is the projected width of the elenlent on an
axis perpendicular to A A , b is the elenlent
width;
d is the perpendicular distance from B to the t is the element
thickness;
centre-line of the element;
d is the perpendiculardistancefrom G to
R the centre-line of the elenlent;
P=Ybd Y A is the total
section
area;
2
The sunmation for P extends only to the half of the R
section aboveAA. It begins with the second element, P = cbd
since there is no contribution from the first elenlent 2
(for which d = O). The sununation forP extends only to the upper half of
The sign convention.is as follows: the section. It begins with the second element, since
(a) u,b, t are always positive; there is no contribution fromthe first element (for
which d = O). The sign conventionis as follows:
(b) c is taken as positive if the element considered
in the sense towards B is convergent withAA, and (a) b, t are always positive;
negative if divergent; (b) d is taken as positive if the elenlent produced in
(c) d is taken as positive if the element produced in the sense towardsG has G on its left, and negative if
the sem towards B has B on its left; and negative if G is on its right.
B is on its right. 6.6.2 Formula
6.5.2 Formulae The warping factorH is given by the following
The distance e by which the shear centre liesto the
left of B is given by:
1
(P+K)(P+K-M)+-
3 b2d211
--``,``,,``,````````,``````,,,,`-`-`,,`,,`,`,,`---
where where
I u is the second moment of area of the whole
section aboutAA.
The warping factorH is then given by:
NOTE. This t,reatment only C O V ~ ~aS section that can be developed

from a single piece of sheet (possibly varying in thickness). For
sections that bifurcate, refer to the literature.
NOTE. This treatment only covers sections that can be developed 6.6.3 Specimen calculation
from a single piece. of sheet (possible varying h thickness). For
sections that bifurcate it is necessary to refer to the literature. Table G.2 gives a specimen calculationfor a
skew-synmetric section.The elements taken into
consideration in this calculation are the numbers
within trianglesin the diagram in table G.2.

136
O BSI 07-1999
~
1 -
STD=BSI BS 8118: PART 1-ENGL 1991 m 1b24bb9 0794b40 207 m

Appendix G BS 8118 :Part 1 : 1991
Rth element
I s t element
S -
A A
Figure 6.3 Monosymmetric section notation.
--``,``,,``,````````,``````,,,,`-`-`,,`,,`,`,,`---

137
a b l e G.l Specimen calculation: monosymmetric shape
!
A-
U1 dimensions are in millimetres.

R= 2 3 4
b 30 128 32
t 5 5 8
U 60 100 127
c O 80 -25
d 60 28 189
bd 1.80 X 1@ 3.58 X 103 6.05 X 103
P 1.80 X 1@ 5.40 X 103 1.14 X 104
2aP 2.16 X loi 1.08 X lo6 2.90 x 106
5d(a - c/G) 1.08 X lo5 3.10 X lo5 7.94 x 105
BaP - bd(a - c/G) 1.08 X 105 7.70 X l@ 2.11 x 106
bt(2aP- bd (a - &)J 1.62 X 107 4.93 x los 5.40 X 10s
Sunmution of last line = 1.05 X 109 mm"
--``,``,,``,````````,``````,,,,`-`-`,,`,,`,`,,`---
(obtained by calculation not shown) = 2.35 X lo7 m m 4

Shear-centre positione = 1.05 X 109 = 45 nun
.35 X 107
PZ 3.24 X 106 1.30 X los
3dP 3.24 X 106 6.90 X lo7
!9d"l.3 1.08 X lo6 1.22 X 107
Pz - bdP + @&/3 1.08 x 106 7.32 X 107
it (P2- bclP + b2d2/3) 1.62 X 10s 1.87 X 1O'O
hmmation of last line = 2.80 X 10'0 mm6
Narping factor H = (2 x 2.80 X lolo) - (452 X 2.35 x lo7)
= 8.41 X lo9m m G

138
Provided by IHS under license with BSI - Uncontrolled Copy Licensee=Rolls Royce Enterprise Wide/5973912035, User=Wootton, John O ßSI 07-1999
V t h element
1
1 s t element
Centroid andshear-centre
both lie at the point o f
symmetry G
r= Mid - thickness L ¡ne
Figure 6.4 Skew-symmetric section notation
6 . 7 Asymmetric section composed of flat 1’
elements P=Cbd
1
6.7.1 Notation and signconvention 1‘
The section is broken down into n flat elements, P =zbd’

numbered from 1to n starting from an edgeE of the 1
section (see figureG.5). The sign convention is as follows:
The following notation relates to the r&element: (a) b and t are always positive;
b is the element width; (b) a, and a, are the actual co-ordinates of R, which
t is the element thickness; nmy be positive or negative dependingon the
a, and a, are the co-ordinates of the nudpoint R of quadrant within whichR lies;
the element with respect to u,v (the principal axes (c) c, and C, are positive if u (or v ) increases
of the section); within the element in the sense away from the
c, and c, are the projected widths of element on G, previous (r-1)th element; and negative if u (or u)
and G, respectively; decreases;
d is the perpendicular distance fromG (the centroid
(d) d and d’ are positive if the element producedin
of the section); the sense away fromthe (r-1)th element has an
anticlockwise monlent aboutG (or S); and negative
d’ is the perpendicular distancefrom S (the shear if clockwise.
centre) to be located. U and Vare the co-ordinates
of s.
--``,``,,``,````````,``````,,,,`-`-`,,`,,`,`,,`---

O ßSI 07-1999
139
6.7.2 Formulae warping
factor
The H is then given by the following:
The cclordinates of the shear centre S are given by the
following:
1
(P' - K')(P' - R - bd') + y]]
where
1 bd'
Kt=z~bt(P"--)
1
2
A is the section area.
NOTE. This treatment only covers sections that can be developtd
from a single piece of she& (possibly varying in thickness). F&
where W' arethe ='OOfnd area Of the that bifurcate it is necessary to refer to the literature.
sections
section about Guand G,.
6.7.3 Specimen calculation
Table G.3 gives a specimen calculation foran
asynmetric section. The elements taken into
consideration in this calculation are the menibers
within trianglesin the diagram in table G.3.
--``,``,,``,````````,``````,,,,`-`-`,,`,,`,`,,`---

140
Appendix G BS 8118 :Part 1 : 1991
nth element
7
r th element
Figure 6.5 Asymmetric section notation
O BSI 07-19!39 --``,``,,``,````````,``````,,,,`-`-`,,`,,`,`,,`---

141
STD=BSI BS ALLA: PART 1-ENGL 1991
No reproduction or networking permitted without license from IHS m
Lb24bb9 0 7 7 4 b 4 4 954 W
Table 6.2 Specimen calculation: skew-symmetric shapes
Centroid and shear-centre

both lie at point of symmetry G
Dinlensions are in millinietres unless otherwise indicated.
R= 1 2 3
50 40 20
2 3 3
--``,``,,``,````````,``````,,,,`-`-`,,`,,`,`,,`---
O 40 -70
bd 1600 -1400
P 1600 200
bt(P - bdn) 96 O00 %
o00
Sunmmtion of last line = 150 O00 nun4
(P + k)(P + k - bd) 287 X 103 -570 X 103 - 357 X 103

b2d2/3 O 853 X 103 653 X 103
&[((P + @(P + K - b d ) ] + 28.7 X 106 34.0 x 106 17.8 X 106
+ (b2&ß)]
Sununation of last line = 80.5+ 106 mm6
Warping factor H = 2 x 80.5 x 106 = 161 x 106m m 6
142
Copyright British Standards Institution O BSI 07-19%
. . ".
.-
. * "".--"
"
4.0 10.0
36.I 62.5
-67.3
- 66.0
-31.0
28.4
13.8
i:::
178.8
I
p --(G++ rw + -op -
I..
V)fi 64.5 mm
17.67 X 16m 4
I
d' - 184.3 32.8 -12.8 20.6
M' - M 7 3717 - 1056 1649
P -4647 -9aa - lsss -317 l
W€" - "n) -0.384 x 106 -1.893 x 1 6 -0.463 x I06 -0.913 x 106
x:[b#p- w'n)l- - 106 - -a
]S1
(P- ITXP -K - M') -5.186 x 106 -2.594 x 106 -0.088 x 106 - 0.913 x 106
w2/9 7.198 x 16 4.605 x 106 0.368 x 106 0.806 x 106
bt[[(P- ITXP - IT - M'))+ 342 x 106 1366 x 106 83 x 106 595 x 106
t (b%%3)]
X~~.a"dw~=1211x10Dmms
143
--``,``,,``,````````,``````,,,,`-`-`,,`,,`,`,,`---

Appendix H BS 8118 :Part 1 : 1991
Appendix H. Lateral torsional buckling of For a unifornl section synunetrical aboutthe n k o r

beams axis only, M,, is given by the following:
H.l Effective lengths of beams
H.l.l Beams supported at both ends
The effective length1 of a beanl for use in4.5.6.6.
should be obtained from tableH.l for beanw with
effective lateral restraintsat their ends only.
For beanw with effective lateral restraintsat intervals
within their length,the value of 1 should be taken as
+ Xßx
21
y)"}
GJ
the length between restraints.
where
H.1.2 Destabilizing loads
Destabilizing load conditions exist whena load is
applied to the top flange of a beam and boththe load
and the flange are free to deflect laterally relative to
the centroid of the beanl. In such cases the increased
effective lengtksof table H.l should be used. IX is the second
moment of area
around the major centroid axis
For beanw carrying destabilizing loads with effective
lateral restraints at intervals within their lengths,the YO is the
distance
between
centroid
and
value of 1 should be taken as 1.2 tinles the length shear centre;
between restraints.
A is the cross-sectional area of the
H. 1.3 Cantilevers cantilever
For cantilevers with no internlediate restraints and no
moment applied at the tip, the effective length 1 should x and y are the CO - ordinates of the element
be obtained from tableR2. of area dA withrespect to the I
CO - ordinate axes through the
If internlediate restraintsare provided, the values of 1 centroid. I
for the lengths between restraints should be obtained
from H.l.l or H.1.2.
For cantilevers subjectedto a moment at the tip, 1 In both cases referencemay be made to published
should be obtained from H.l.l or H.1.2. literature for solutions forMc, relating to loading
arrangements other than unifornl monleAt. When such
H.2 Determination of I allowances are made in d e t e m w g L,M in 4.5.6.4
The lateral torsional buckling slenderness paranleterL should be taken as the maxinlunl value in the beam.
is obtained from the following (see4.5.6.6@)): H.3 Beams of varying section throughout their
A = R(ES/Mcr) '
--``,``,,``,````````,``````,,,,`-`-`,,`,,`,`,,`---
length
where When the section of a doubly symmetrical bean1 varies
along its length between restraint points,the buckling
Mcr critical uniform monlent
is the elastic stress P, should be deternined using the properties of
E and S are as defined in 4.5.6.6. the section at the point of maxinlunl moment. This
value of p , then applies throughoutthe length between
For a doubly symmetricaluniform section, M,, is given restraint points andno further allowances forthe
by the following: pattern of moments should be made.
3
Mc, = (EIyGJ) (1 + n2 EHl12GJ) ' Provided that Rfis not less than 0.2, the value of L
based on the cross-section at the point of nmximum
where moment should be multiplied by
(1.5 - 0.5Rf) 2 1.0
IY issecond
themoment of area where Rf is the ratio of flange area at the point of
about the centroid axis, minimum moment to that ai the point of maxin~unl
G, J and H are as defined in 1.3. moment between adjacent restraint points.
Rfrefers eitherto the ratio of total area of both
flanges or to the area of the conlpression flange only,
whichever givesthe smaller valueof Rf.Values of Rf
less than 0.2 represent an extreme degree of flange
taper which is not covered by this clause.

~~
BS 8118 :Part 1 : 1991 Appendix H
'bble H.1 Effective length 1 for beams of length L

Conditions of restraint at supports ILoading conditions
t Normal Destabilizing
Compression flange laterally Both flanges fully restrainedagainst 0.85L
restrained rotation on plan
Bean1 fully restrained against torsion Both flanges partially restrained against 0.85L 1.OL
rotation on plan
Both flanges freeto rotate on plan 1.OL 1.25
Compression flange laterally Restraint against torsion provided only 1.OL + W 1.z+ 20
unrestrained. by positive connection of bottom flange
Both flanges free to rotate on plan to supports
Restraint against torsion provided only 1.2L +W 1.4 +W
by dead bearing of bottonl flange on
supports
NOTE. D is the depth of beam. L is the bean enpth.
~~~
I
kble H.2 Effective length 1 for cantilever of length L 1
Restraint conditions T Loading conditions
i t support At tip Normal Destabilizing
2ontinuous with lateral restraint only Free 3.0L 7.5L
Laterally restrainedon top flange only 2.7L 7.5L
Torsionally restrained only 2.4L 4.5L
Laterally and torsionally restrained 2. lL 3.m
2ontinuous with lateral and torsional Free 1.OL 2.5L
Pstraint Lateral restraint on top flange only 0.9L 2.5L
--``,``,,``,````````,``````,,,,`-`-`,,`,,`,`,,`---
Torsionally restrained only 0.W 1.5L
Laterally and torsionally restrained 0.7L 1.2L
Built-in laterally&d torsionally Free O.% 1.U
Lateral restraint on top flange only O. 7L 1.4
Torsionally restrained only 0.GL 0.GL
LateraUy and torsionally restrained 0.5L 0.5L

~~ ~
~ ~
STD-BSI BS 8118: PART 1-ENGL 1991 Lb2libbS

075libli9
li3b m
Appendix J BS 8118 : Part 1 : 1991
Appendix J. 'Ilmional buckling of struts: The required quantityfor the slenderness paranleterJ.
determination of slenderness parameter A allowing for flexural interactionis obtained from the
--``,``,,``,````````,``````,,,,`-`-`,,`,,`,`,,`---
following:
5.1 General
J. = kJ.t
In strut design, the rigorous determination ofthe
slenderness parameter1for torsional buckling tendsto where
be laborious. A sinlplified procedure is provided
in 4.7.5.2@) using empirical fomwlae(see table 4.9), k is the interactionfactor(see 5.4);
but this only covers a limited range of section shapes. At is the slenderness p m l e t e r that
The purpose of this appendix is to present a general corresponds to torsional buckling (see5.3).
procedure, that enables J. to be found for any section.
This more rigorous procedure may of course be 5.3 Determination of At
applied to the sections in table 4.9 if desired and The general expressionfor the slenderness At,
economies may result. correspondmg to pure torsional buckling,is as follows:
The treatment involvesthe use of the following
properties of the section which nlay be found using 10
appendix G " = (1 + 26H/J12) %
where
(a) J is the torsion constane
(b) Ip is the polar second monlentof area about Io = 5.14 (Ida%;
shear centre; 1 is the effectivebucklinglength;
(c) H is the warping factor.
5.2 Buckling modes It should be noted that sections conlposed of radiating
There are three fundamental modes forthe overall outstands do not warp when theytwist (H = O), giving
bucklmg of a strut, as follows, where uu and W are the At = 1,. Examples of such shapes are angles, tees and
principal axes of the section crucifornls.
(a) pure colunm, i.e. flexural,
bucklig about W; 5.4 Determination of k
(b) pure colunm buckling about uu; 5.4.1 Section free from flexural interaction
(c) pure torsional buckling.
It is found that the three fundanlental modes of overall
Pure torsional bucklingis defined as a bodily rotation buckling (see 5.2) do not interact with one another,
of the section aboutits shear centre, over the central when the sectionis of either of the following types
part of the length of the member. In practice this pure (see figure J.1):
torsional buckling is only observed for certain shapes (a) bisynnetric;
of section. For the majority of shapes it is found that @) skew-synmetric.
interaction takes place between pure torsion and
flexure, with the centre of rotation moving away from For such sections k = 1, or in other words A = L,.
the shear centre. The resulting decreasein resistance In calculating At, 1 should be taken the sanle as for
to torsional bucklmg should be taken into account in colunm buckliig about the nlqjor principal axis
design. (see 4.7.4.2).
I (a) Bisymmetric @) Skew-symmetric
Figure J.l Sections which exhibit no interaction between thepure

torsional and flexural buckling modes

5.4.2 Monosgmmetric sections 5.4.3 Asgmmetric sections
For sections having a singleaxis of synmetry ss (see When the section has no axis of synmletry, as in
figure J.2), the pure torsional mode interactswith figure 5.3 the three fundanlental modesall interact,
colunm bucklingabout ss giving the following: leading to an equation for I as follows:
I = kAt A = (&/.")It
where where
k is read from figure 4.11 taking S and X as follows:
S = Is/&; Q = Sv(3x/(C+ sv2))";
x
= IglIp; X = IglIp;
--``,``,,``,````````,``````,,,,`-`-`,,`,,`,`,,`---
where SV = A&;
1, is the slenderness paranleter for pure
I, is the slenderness paranleter for pure column colunm buckling aboutW;
buckling about SS;
It is the slendernessparanleterforpure is the slenderness paranleter for pure
torsional buckling; torsional buckling;
Ig is the polar second nlonlent of area.about C = (1 - u%pz) + y( 1 - v2/Yp2);
centroid G; is the polar radius of gyration of
Ip is the second monlent of area about shear rP
section about shear centre S
centre S.
Uand V are the coordinates of shear centre
The effective length 1 to be used in finding I , and It (see figure5.3);
should be found in accordance with 4.7.4.2, based on X is the lowest root of the following
colunm buckling aboutSS. cubic equation:
NOTE. For such sections column buckling about the axis $-@++-B=O
perpendicular to SS occurs independently, without interaction.
where
27@Y+
B = (C + $33
where
y = Iu/Iv
I" and I, are the second monlentsof area about use
and W, the principal axes of section
The cubic nlay be solved withthe aid of the
NOTE. The pure torsional buckling mode interacts with flexure
about SS. nomogram illustrated in figure5.4
Figure 5.2 Monosymmetric section

148
~
~
STD-BSI BS BLLB: PART L-ENGL 1993 L b 2 q b b l 077qb51 094

Appendix J BS 8118 :Part 1 : 1991
NOTE.The three fundamental buckling modes (pure torsion,
--``,``,,``,````````,``````,,,,`-`-`,,`,,`,`,,`---
flexure about uu, flexure about W) all interact
Figure 5.3 A symmetric section
~~~

O BSI 07-1999
149
BS 8118 :Part 1 : 1991 Amendix .J
3.0 -
2.6 -
2.5 - - 0.1 o
-
- 0.1 2
-
- 0.1 4
-
--``,``,,``,````````,``````,,,,`-`-`,,`,,`,`,,`---
- 0.1 6
-
- 0.1 8
-
- 0.20
-
- 0.22
-
- 0.24
-
- 0.26
-
- 0.28
r2.4
- 0.30
-
- 0.32
-
- 0.34
-
3.6 - 0.36
-
1.1 - 0.38
-
1.0 - 0.40
-
0.9 - 0.42
0.44
0.46
O.#
0.50
NOTE. The figure is taken from R. Kappus. ""sting failure of centrally loaded open section
columns in the elastic range". NACA Technical Memorandum No.851,193.
Figure 5.4 Nomogram for solving cubic equation x3 - + Ax - B = O

150
~
STD-BSI BS ALLB: PART It-ENGL 1991 H l b 2 4 b b 9 0794b53 9b7 m

Appendix K BS 8118 : Part 1 : 1991
0.3
0.2
PS
4
0.1
--``,``,,``,````````,``````,,,,`-`-`,,`,,`,`,,`---
O
100 120 140 160 180 200
P, is the buckling stress; P, is as defined in 4.7.6.2 or 4.7.6.4

Figure K.l. Buckling strength at high slenderness
Copyright British Standards Institution O BSI 07-1999 151

STD.BSI BS BLbLB: PART 1-ENGL 1993 L b 2 9 b b S 0794b59 B T 3 M
BS 8118 :Part 1 : 1991 Appendix K
a b l e K . l Equations to design curves

Figure Curve Formula Range
4.2 B g=l
A g = 0.70 + 0.30
g = 0.801(1 - Y&),
h = ( 1 + 0.1 (Cl¿ - 1)2]-E
h = [ 1 + 2.5 ( C l t -1)2/(blt)]-
h = [ 1 + 4.5 (ch - 1)2)l(b/t)}-
4.5 A kL = l l h - 28h2 7 <x I12.1
kL = 1 0 5 1 ~ ~ x 5 12.1
B kL = 1OIX - 24x2 6 < x 5 12.9
kL = 10.51~~ x 2 12.9
C kL = 3Ux - 2 2 0 1 ~ ~ x > 22
D kL = 2 9 1 -
~ 198/x2 x > 18
E kL = 1OWX2
where x = ßh
4.11
=[ 1+sz
Buckling curves:
2x9
+
- {(1 s2)2 - 4Xs2)" I"
PS = NP1
--``,``,,``,````````,``````,,,,`-`-`,,`,,`,`,,`---
where
-
A1 c
4.9 0.G 0.10
4.10 (a) 0.2 0.20
(b) 0.2 0.45
(c) 0.80 0.2
L12 (a) 0.4 0.35
(b> 0.6 0.20

152
Appendix K BS 8118 :Part 1 : 1991
I 'Igble K.l Equation to design curves (concluded) 1

Figure :tuve Formula lange
5.4
v1 = (5.35 + 4 6)
2 4 3 0
!.5 2 -
a > 1.0
d
5.5
5.6
5.7
e = 2-3 tan1 (au)

is as found from figure 5.4
v1
E1 tr I25
9 = 1.0 = 1.0
TO
"> 1
Tl
--``,``,,``,````````,``````,,,,`-`-`,,`,,`,`,,`---

O BSI 07-1999
153
BS 8118 :Part 1 : 1991 Appendix L
Appendix L. Fatigue strength data L.2 Conditions when higher fatigue strengths
may occur
L.l Derivation of fr - N data In some designs where fatigue doninates and where
The designf, - N curves in figure 7.9 are obtained from the achievement of nlinimum mass or mininun initial
constant amplitude test data with endurances generally cost is of particular economic importance,the option
in the regionof to 2 X 106 cycles.Themajority of of obtaining specific fatigue strength data may be
data have been obtained from narrow plate specimens resorted to (see 8.4.4). In order to make a decision
in the region of 6 mm to 12 mm thick. More recently a whether or not to obtain further databy testing, the
database of some 120fr - N curves for both extruded following factors may be taken into account.
and fabricated I-beams in thicknesses inthe range (a) Benefits may result where residual stresses are
8 mm to 15 mm has also been included. Materials cover kept low or conlpressive in the direction of stress
the more commonlyused 5
alloys and 7020.
and 6 ***
series ***
fluctuation eitherby a carefuuy controlled
fabrication sequence (particularly welding)or by
The design curves representa survival probability of at subsequent mechanical improvement techniques, e.g.
least 97.5 % for the classified details tested, whenall hole expansion or weld toe peening. The nlain
the relevant tests data for each detail typeare analysed benefits are likely to occur wherethe damage arises
together. 'lJqically the mean fatiguestrength& - N mainly from high endurance stress ranges in the
curve forthe data within any one detail typeis 30 % to spectrum (see figureL.l)
50 % m e r than the design curve. @) Higher fatigue strengthsmay occur where the
The curves are considered to be safe for any condition scale of the component is small. This may apply
of mean stress up to the tensile proof stress. No when thicknesses and weld sizesare lower than
relaxation is recommended for applied lower mean e mm.
stresses as the actual mean stress local to positions of (c) If there is a stress gradient with a rapid
potential fatigue crack initiation may be high even reduction of stress away from the initiation site,
though the nominal stress is not. This applies hgher fatigue strengthsmay occur, for exampleat a
particularly to welded structures and complex transverse welded attachmentor a plate in bending.
structures where weld shrinkage and lackof fit
stresses can occur respectively, (d) If the spectrunl shape is fairly flat with a large
number of cycles at or below the constant amplitude
The new curve prodùcedby the change in slopeof the non-propagating stress level, the effective slope
design curve beyond 5 X 106 cycles has been chosento beyond 5 X 106 cycles may be significantly flatter
be a lower bound to take account of danmge due to a (see figure L. 1).
high stress range in the spectrum. A high stress range
can allow stress ranges below the initial If testing is resorted to and a higher strength obtained,
non-propagating stress level to add to crack growth it is important that the conditions for fabrication are
damage. In the absence of variable amplitudetest data not varied in any way during production.This applies
the lower slope of m + 2 has been found by fracture to detail geometry, sequence (including jigging and
mechanics to be safe for most commonly used welding), weld quality, surface preparation (including
spectrum shapes. maclurung, hole drilling and cleaning).
,
~
--``,``,,``,````````,``````,,,,`-`-`,,`,,`,`,,`---

154
STDOBSI BS 8118: PART 1-ENGL L991 m 1b2'IbbS 0 7 9 q b 5 7 502 W
Appendix L BS 8118 :Part 1 : 1991
I I
io5 5 x106
Endurance N (cycles)
Figure L . l Zone of greatest variation in effective& - N curves
--``,``,,``,````````,``````,,,,`-`-`,,`,,`,`,,`---
Copyright British StandardsO BSI 07-1999

Institution
155
STD=BSI BS 8118: PART 1-ENGL 1991 1b24bb9 0794b58 gq9
BS 8118 : Part 1 : 1991
"
Publications referred to
BS 499 Welding terms and symbols
Part 1 Glossary f o r welding, brazing and thermal cutting
Part 2 Specification f o r s p b o l s for welding
BS 729 Specification for hot dip galvanized coatings on ironand steel articles
BS llGl Specification for aluminiumaUoy sections for structural purposes
BS 1470 Specvication for wroughtaluminium and aluminium alloys f o r general engineering purposes:
plate, sheet and strip
BS 1471 Specification f o r wrought aluminiumand aluminium alloys f o r general engineering purposes
- drawn tube
BS 1472 Specification f o r wrought aluminium and aluminium alloys f o r g& engineering purposes
-forging stock and forgings
BS 1473 Specvication f o r wrought aluminium and aluminium aUoys f o r general engineering purposes
- rivet, bolt and screw stock
BS 1474 Specification f o r wrought aluminium and aluminium alloys f o r general engineering purposes
- bars, extruded round tubes and sections
BS 1490 Specification f o r aluminium and aluminium aUoy ingots and castingsf o r general engineering
purposes
BS 1974 SpecZfication for large aluminium aUoy rivets (Yi in. to 1 in. nominal diameters)
BS 2451 Specification f o r chided iron shot and grit
BS 2573 Rules f w the design of manes
BS 2901 F i k rods and wires for gas-shielded arc welding
--``,``,,``,````````,``````,,,,`-`-`,,`,,`,`,,`---
Part 4 Specificationf o r aluminium and aluminium alloys and magnesium alloys

BS 3019 TIG welding
Part 1 Specification f o r TIG welding of aluminium, magnesium and theira h y s
BS 3518 Methods of fatigue testing
BS 3571 MIG welding
Part 1 Specification f o r MIG welding of aluminium and aluminium alloys
BS 4300 Wrought aluminium and aluminium alloys f o r general engineering purposes
(supplementayy series)
Part 1 Aluminium ahoy longitudinally welded tube
Part 12 5454 Bars, extruded round tube and sections
Part 14 7020 Plate, sheet and strip
Part 15 7020 Bar, extruded round tube and sections
BS 4395 Specification for high strength f i c t i o n grip bolts and associated nuts and washersfor
structural engineering
Part 1 G e n e m l grade
BS 4604 Spec$ficationfor the use of high strengthfmction grip bolts in structural steelwork. Metric series
Part 1 General grade
BS 4870 Speafication f o r approval testing of welding procedures
Part 2 TIG or MIG of aluminium and its alloys
BS 5350 Methods of test for adhesives
Part C5 Determination of bond strength in longitudinal shear
BS 5400 Steel, concrete and composite bridges
Part 10 Code of practice for fatigue
BS 5500 Specification for unfired fusion welded pressure vessels
BS 5G49 Lighting columns
156
O BSI 07-1999
S T D = B S I BS 8118: PART 3-ENGL 1991 1b2qbb9 079qb59 385 m
BS 8118 : Part 1 : 1991
BS 6105 Specification f o r corrosion-resistant stainlesssteel fasteners

BS 6399 Loading for buildings
Part 1 Code of practice for dead and imposed loads
BS 8100 Lattice towers and masts
BS 8118 Structurai useof aluminium
Part 2 Specification for materials, workmanship and protection
CP 3 Code of basic data f o r the design of buildings
Chapter V Loading
Part 2 Wind loads
CP 143 Code of practice for sheet roof and W& coverings
Part 15 Aluminium. Metric units
PD 6484 Commentary on corrosion at bimetaUic contacts and its aUeviation
Is0 209 Wrought aluminium and aluminium aUoys - Chernical composition and forms of products
Part 1 Chemical composition
IS0 2107 Aluminium, magnesium and their &YS - Temper designations
R. Kappus, Twisting failureof centra& loaded open section columns in elastic range'. NACA Technical
Memorandum No. 851, 1938.
BS EN 10002 Tensile testing of metuUic materials
Part 1 Method of test at ambient temperature
--``,``,,``,````````,``````,,,,`-`-`,,`,,`,`,,`---

BS 8118 :
Part 1 : 1991
BSI - British StandardsInstitution
BSI is the independent national body responsible for preparing British

Standards.It
presents the UK view on standards in Europe andat the international level, Itis
incorporated by Royal Charter.
Revisions
British Standardsare updated by amendmentor revision. Users of BritishStandards
should makesure that they possess the latest amendmentsor editions.
It is the constant aim of BSI to improve the quality of our products and services.
We
would be gratefulif anyone finding an inaccuracyor ambiguity whileusing this
British standard would inform the Secretary of the technical committee responsible,
the identity of which canbe found on the inside front cover.Tel 020 8996 9OOO.
Fax: O20 8996 7400.
BSI offers members an individual updating service called PLUS which ensuresthat
subscribers automatically receive
the latest editions of standards.
Buying standards
Orders forall BSI, international and foreign standards publications should
be
addressed to Customer Services.Tel 020 8996 9001. Fax: 020 8996 7001.
In response to orders forinternational standards,it is BSI policyto supply the BSI
implementationof those that have been publishedas British Standards,unless
otherwise requested.
Information on standards
BSI provides a wide mnge of informationon national, European andinternational
standards through its Library andits Technical Helpto Exporters Service. Various
BSI electronic information services are also available which give details
on all its
products and services. Contact the Information Centre.Tel O20 8996 7111.
Fax: O20 8996 7048.
Subscribing membersof BSI are kept upto date with standards developments and
on the purchase priceof standads. For detailsof
receive substantial discounts
Membership Administration. Tel: 020 8996 7002.
these and other benefits contact
Fax: 020 8996 7001.
copyright
Copyright subsists in all BSI publications. BSI also holds the copyright, in the UK, of
the publications of the intemational standardhationbodies. Except as permitted
under the Copyright, Designs andpatents Act 1988 no extract may be reproduced,
stored in a retrieval systemor transmitted in any formor by any means- electronic,
photocopying, recordmgor otherwise - without prior written pennission from BSI.
This does not preclude thefree use, in the course of implementingthe standard,of
necessary details suchas symbols, and size, type or grade designations.If these
details are to be used for anyother purposethan implementation thenthe prior
written permissionof BSI must be obtained.
If pennission is granted, the terms may include royalty paymentsor a licensing
agreement. Details and advicecan be obtained fromthe Copyright Manager.
Tel: 020 8996 7070.
--``,``,,``,````````,``````,,,,`-`-`,,`,,`,`,,`---
BSI
389 Chiswick High Road
London
W4 4AL


BS8118 - 1991 - Structural Use of Aluminium Part 1

Hochgeladen von

Dokumentinformationen

Originaltitel

Copyright

Verfügbare Formate

Dieses Dokument teilen

Dokument teilen oder einbetten

Freigabeoptionen

Stufen Sie dieses Dokument als nützlich ein?

Sind diese Inhalte unangemessen?

Copyright:

Verfügbare Formate

BS8118 - 1991 - Structural Use of Aluminium Part 1

Hochgeladen von

Copyright:

Verfügbare Formate

BRITISH STANDARD 35 8118 :

NO COPYING WITHOUT BSI PERMISSION EXCEPT AS PERMITTED BY COPYRIGHT LA1

Copyright British Standards Institution

This British Standard, having

10485 July 1999 Indicated by a side line

The followingBSI references

Copyright British Standards Institution

Copyright British Standards Institution

STD-BSI BS 8LL8: PART L-ENGL L992 m l b 2 V b b 9 079V532 Vb3 D

Copyright British Standards Institution

Section 5. Plates and plate girders

Copyright British Standards Institution

STDaBSI BS ALLB: PART L-ENGL L99L L b 2 4 b b 9 0794534 23b

Section 6. Static design of joints

Copyright British Standards Institution

6.8.2 Groups of welds 88

Copyright British Standards Institution 5

STD*BSI BS 8118: PART 1-ENGL 1991 m Lb24bb9 0794517 T q 5 m

4.2 Flat elements understress gradient, valueof g 38

Copyright British Standards Institution

STD-BSI BS 8118: PART L-ENGL 3991 m Lb24bb9 07911518 981 m

6.3 Monosynunetric section notation 137

Copyright British Standards Institution

1.1 scope 1.2.7 factored load

to a range of structures subjected to normal

Copyright British Standards Institution

STD-BSI BS ALLB: PART L-ENGL 1991 m l b 2 4 b b 9 07911521 117b m

Section 1 BS 8118 :Part 1 : 1991

1.2.21 local buckling 1.2.34 stress range

or Distance to a free edge ml, m2 Shear buckling factors (plate girders)

Copyright British Standards Institution

Copyright British Standards Institution

Copyright British Standards Institution

Section 2. Properties and selection of materials

2.1 Designation of materials The choice of this alloy is based on a conlbination

2.2.1.1 Standard materials applications such as curtain walling and window

Copyright British Standards Institution

STD.BSI BS 8LLE: PART L-ENGL J751 D 1 b 2 4 b b 7 077452b T58 m

2.2.1.1.3 Non-heat-treatablealloys. The strongest 5 ***

Copyright British Standards Institution

Copyright British Standards Institution

Previous page is blank

Copyright British Standards Institution

STD-BSI BS BLLB: PART L-ENGL L99L m L b 2 9 b b 9 07q9529 7b7 m

Copyright British Standards Institution

Copyright British Standards Institution

protection of some alloysis necessary. Where

rable 2.6 General corrosion protection of aluminium structures

Copyright British Standards Institution

2.4.3.2 Metal-to-metal contactsincluding joints 2.4.3.3.3 Contact with timber

Copyright British Standards Institution

Copyright British Standards Institution

STD-BSI BS BLLB: PART L-ENGL L771 m L b 2 4 b b 9 0794535 Tb0 W

L200 7020 6061 i083

Copyright British Standards Institution

Copyright British Standards Institution

STDOBSI B S 8238: PART I-ENGL 2991, lb211bb9 07911537 833 M

Table 2.10 Range of sizes for extruded sections 2.7.5 Forgings

Copyright British Standards Institution

Copyright British Standards Institution

STDmBSI BS 8118: PART 1-ENGL L991 D '1b211bb7 0794539 bob D

3.2.4 Dynamic effects Tbble 3.3 Material factors

Copyright British Standards Institution